Foreword - Amazon S3 · 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U) Important information about your Toyota Occupant restraint systems Toyota encourages you and your family

i 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

ForewordWelcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:U.S. OWNERS: ! When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331! Hawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll−free:1−888−272−5515CANADIAN OWNERS: ! When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.Please access our websites for further information.! The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com! Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com! Canada www.toyota.ca

© 2007 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATIONAll rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.

06 12.21

ii 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicledamage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefullyto avoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how theyare used in this manual are explained as follows.

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.

06 12.21

iii 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the timeto read Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. Interms of helping you understand how you can receivethe maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systemsthis vehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manu-al is the most important section for you and your familyto read.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation con-cerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child re-straint systems of this vehicle and some potential haz-ards you should be aware of. These systems work to-gether along with the overall structure of this vehicle inorder to provide occupant restraint in the event of acrash. The effect of each system is enhanced when it isused properly and together with other systems. Nosingle occupant restraint system can, by itself, provideyou or your family with the equal level of restraintwhich these systems can provide when used together.That is why it is important for you and your family tounderstand the purpose and proper use of each of thesesystems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to helpreduce the possibility of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision. None of these systems, either indi-vidually or together, can ensure that there is no injuryin the event of collision. However, the more you knowabout these systems and how to use them properly, thegreater your chances become of surviving an accidentwithout death or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupantsof the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle shouldwear seat belts properly at all times. Children shouldalways be secured in child restraint systems that areappropriate for their age and size. SRS (SupplementalRestraint System) airbags are, as their names imply,designed to work with, and be supplemental to, seatbelts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags canbe very effective in reducing the risk of head and chestinjuries by preventing contact of the head and chestwith interior portions of the vehicle.

06 12.21

iv 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploywith tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of theSRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves poten-tial sources of serious injury if an occupant is too closeto an airbag, or if an object or some part of his or herbody has been placed between the occupant and theairbag at the time of deployment. This is just one exam-ple of how the instructions in Section 1−3 of this Own-er’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the occupantrestraint systems, and increase the safety they can pro-vide to you and your family in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Sec-tion 1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed duringyour time of ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and controlcertain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assistin driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there isa system to record data in a crash or a near car crashevent. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. Ina crash or a near car crash event, this device mayrecord some or all of the following information:

! Engine speed

! Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

! Vehicle speed

! To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

! Position of the transmission selector lever

! Whether the driver and front passenger wore theseat belts or not

! Driver’s seat position

! Front passenger’s occupant classification

06 12.21

v 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

! SRS airbag deployment data

! SRS airbag system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for thepurpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlikegeneral data recorders, the EDR does not record sounddata such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR toa third party except when:

! An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

! Officially requested by the police or other authorities

! Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

! Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

! Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safetyperformance

! Disclose the data to a third party for researchpurposes without disclosing details of the vehicleowner, and only when it is deemed necessary

! Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-cation information to a non−Toyota organization forresearch purposes

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyotalimited warranties:

! New vehicle warranty

! Emission control systems warranty

! Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

06 12.21

vi 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that thespecified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives de-tails of these maintenance requirements. Also includedin Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduledmaintenance information, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health and safetyinformation about your Toyota

CAUTION

! WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles aswell as waste produced by component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

! Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

06 12.21

vii 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. Youshould know that Toyota does not warrant these productsand is not responsible for their performance, repair, or re-placement, or for any damage they may cause to, or ad-verse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durabili-ty, and may even violate governmental regulations. Inaddition, damage or performance problems resulting fromthe modification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equip-ment Standard.

Installation of a mobiletwo−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such asmultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuelinjection system, electronic throttle control system, elec-tronic engine control system, anti−lock brake system,SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system,be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precaution-ary measures or special instructions regarding installa-tion.

06 12.21

viii 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

Tires and loading on your Toyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire inflation pres-sure and the excess load may result in thedeterioration of steering ability and braking abil-ity, leading to an accident. Check the tire infla-tion pressure periodically and be sure to keepthe load limits given in this Owner’s Manual.For details about tire inflation pressure andload limits, see pages 274 and 201.

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices inyour Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicleis scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left asthey are, it may cause an accident such as a fire. Besure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seatbelt pretensioner removed and disposed of by the quali-fied service shop or by your Toyota dealer before youdispose of your vehicle.

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. Thischeck is done approximately five hours after the engine isturned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. Itdoes not indicate a malfunction.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply,See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate.These components may include airbag, seat belt preten-sioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

06 12.21

12007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 1

2 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U)

Instrument panel overview

1. Window lock switch

2. Cup holders

3. Side vents

4. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent sys-tem indicator light

5. Auxiliary boxes

6. Instrument cluster

7. Center vents

8. Glove boxes

9. Personal lights

10. Power window switches

11. Automatic transmission selector lever ormanual transmission gear shift lever

12. Parking brake lever

13. Power door lock switches

14. AUX adapter

15. Power rear view mirror control switches

16. Hood lock release lever

17. Instrument panel light control dial

06 12.21

PS11505


1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog lightswitches

2. Wiper and washer switches

3. Emergency flasher switch

4. Audio system

5. Front passenger airbag on−off indicatorlights

6. Front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight

7. Rear window defogger switch

8. Power outlet

9. Air conditioning controls

10. Ignition switch

11. Tilt steering lock release lever

06 12.21

PS11502


PS11503

1. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Clock

5. Clock reset knob

6. Odometer and two trip meters

7. Fuel gauge

8. Trip meter reset knob

06 12.21

Instrument cluster overview!With tachometer


PS11504

1. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

2. Speedometer

3. Trip meter reset knob

4. Odometer and two trip meters

5. Fuel gauge

6. Clock

7. Clock reset knob

06 12.21

!Without tachometer


Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

Brake system warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Anti-lock brake system warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warninglight∗1

Low fuel level indicator light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

or

or

or

Electric power steering system warning light∗1

or

06 12.21


“AIRBAG ON” indicator light

Taillight indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Headlight high beam indicator light

High engine coolant temperature warning light∗1

Headlight low beam indicator light

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 114 in Section 1−6.

∗2: For details, see “Engine coolant temperature indicator andwarning light” on page 111 in Section 1−6.

Low engine coolant temperature indicator light∗2

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light

Front fog light indicator light

06 12.21


06 12.21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 2


PS12501

With wireless remote control (type A)

PS12538

With wireless remote control (type B)

PS12502

Without wireless remote control

These keys work in every lock.

Since the side doors and back door canbe locked without a key, you should al-ways carry a spare key in case you acci-dentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.

PS12503

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

06 12.21

Keys (without engineimmobilizer system)


PS12504

With wireless remote control (type A)

US12029

With wireless remote control (type B)

PS12505

Without wireless remote control

Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys workin every lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key also works inevery lock.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the head ofthe master and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.

Since the side doors and back door canbe locked without a key, you should al-ways carry a spare key in case you acci-dentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.

06 12.21

Keys (with engine immobilizersystem)


PS12506

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

! When starting the engine, do notuse the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

PS12507

! When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after remov-ing other transponder keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.

PS12508

! Do not bend the key grip.

! Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

! Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

! Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder direct sunlight.

! Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

! Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials.

06 12.21


PS12509

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

Engine immobilizer system

PS12510

The engine immobilizer system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The engine will start only whenthe electronic code in the chip corre-sponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle.

PS12511

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.The indicator light will start flashing toshow the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

! The indicator light stays on.

! The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

! The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

06 12.21


Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the system,which enables the engine to start. Theindicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with a built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobilizer sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, proper opera-tion of the system cannot be guaran-teed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZRI−20BTY

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

06 12.21


Wireless remote control—

PS12512

Type A

US12030

Type B

If the wireless remote control key doesnot actuate the doors or operate from anormal distance, or the indicator light onthe key is dimmed or does not come on:

1. Indicator light

2. Unlock switch

3. Lock switch

4. Panic switch

The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock the sidedoors and back door, from a distancewithin approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of thevehicle.

When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely. At this time, the indi-cator light flashes once.

The wireless remote control key is anelectronic component. Observe the follow-ing instructions in order not to cause dam-age to the key.

! Do not leave the key in places wherethe temperature becomes high such ason the dashboard.

! Do not disassemble it.

! Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

! Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol keys for the same vehicle. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

! Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the key.

! The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the key. Toreplace the battery, see “—Replacingbattery” on page 18.

If you lose your wireless remote controlkey, contact your Toyota dealer as soonas possible to avoid the possibility oftheft, or an accident. (See “If you loseyour keys” on page 245.)

06 12.21


For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZB41TG

FCC ID: MOZB21RG

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

PS12513

Locking operation (type A)

PS12539

Locking operation (type B)

06 12.21

—Locking and unlocking thedoors and back door


PS12514

Unlocking operation (type A)

PS12540

Unlocking operation (type B)

To lock and unlock all the doors, pushthe switches of the wireless remotecontrol key slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the lock switch. All the sidedoors and back door are locked simulta-neously. At this time, the turn signal lightswill flash once.

Check to see that the doors are securelylocked.

If any of the doors is not securely closed,or if the key is in the ignition switch,locking cannot be performed by the lockswitch.

To unlock: Push the unlock switch once tounlock the driver’s door alone. Pushingthe switch twice within 3 seconds unlocksall the doors simultaneously. Each timethe unlock switch is pushed, the turn sig-nal lights will flash twice.

When the unlock switch is pressed, theinterior light will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.(For further information, see “Interior light”on page 105.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will be automati-cally locked again.

If the lock or unlock switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push it again.

06 12.21


—Activating panic mode

PS12515

Type A

PS12541

Type B

Pushing the panic switch for 1 secondblows the horn intermittently andflashes the headlights, tail lights andemergency flashers and turns on theinterior light.

The panic switch is used to deter vehicletheft when you witness anyone attemptingto break into or damage your vehicle.

The panic mode will last for one minute.To stop the panic mode midway, do thefollowing:

! Push any switch on the key.

! Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

The panic mode does not work when theignition key is in the “ON” position.

—Replacing batteryFor replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent and a flatheadscrewdriver or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed battery or components.

NOTICE

! When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

! Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

! Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the battery by following theseprocedures:

06 12.21


QS12015

1. Open the cover using a flathead screw-driver wrapped with plastic tape.

QS12016

2. Remove the module from the key case.

QS12017

3. Remove the battery cover of the mod-ule.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

4. Remove the discharged battery and putin a new battery with positive (+) sideup.

06 12.21


NOTICE

! Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the battery arefaced correctly.

! Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

! Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

! Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the battery and thatdust or oils do not adhere to thecase.

! Close the cover securely.

5. Install the battery cover of the module.

6. Install the module into the key caseand secure the cover.

After replacing the battery, check that thekey operates properly. If the key still doesnot operate properly, contact your Toyotadealer.

Side doors—

PS12516

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

Vehicles with the power door lock sys-tem—All the side doors and back doorlock and unlock simultaneously with thedriver’s door. In the driver’s door lock,turning the key once will unlock the driv-er’s door and twice in succession will un-lock all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously.

When the interior light switch is in the“DOOR” position and any of the sidedoors is opened, the light will come on.After all the side doors are closed, thelight remains on for about 15 secondsbefore fading out. (For further information,see “Interior light” on page 105 in Section1−5.)

Vehicles with the power door lock sys-tem—When the interior light switch is inthe “DOOR” position, and the driver’s dooris unlocked using the key, the interior lightwill come on and remain on for about 15seconds before fading out. (For furtherinformation, see “Interior light” on page105 in Section 1−5.)

06 12.21


PS12517

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handle even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thefront doors while driving. The doorswill open and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

Vehicles with the power door lock sys-tem—Doors cannot be locked when thedriver’s door is open and the key is in theignition.

PS12518

For driver’s use

PS12519

For front passenger’s use

06 12.21


LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

For driver’s use—

To lock: Push the switch down on theright side.To unlock: Push the switch down on theleft side.

For front passenger’s use—

To lock: Push the switch down on the“LOCK” side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on the“UNLOCK” side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locksor unlocks all the side doors and backdoor.

If you do any of the following, no sidedoor or back door can be unlocked withthe power door lock switch.

! Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the wireless remote control key.

! Set the driver’s door inside lock knobin the lock position, and close the driv-er’s door while holding up the outsidedoor handle.

! Lock all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously with driver’s door.

The power door lock switch can be resetin the following ways.

! Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

! Unlock all the side doors and backdoor simultaneously with the driver’sdoor.

! Unlock all the side doors and backdoor with the wireless remote controlkey.

! Unlock the driver’s door with the insidelock knob, and then unlock all the sidedoors with the power door lock switch.

PS12520

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS(5−door models only)

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, youcannot open the rear door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.

06 12.21


CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-vent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

Power windows

PS12521

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each side door.

The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-tion.

Key off operation: The driver’s windowworks for about 45 seconds even after theignition switch is turned off. They stopworking when either of the front door isopened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.

To close: Pull up the switch.

PS12522

Automatic operation (to open only):Push the switch completely down and thenrelease it. The window will fully open. Tostop the window partway, lightly pull theswitch up and then release it.

06 12.21


PS12523

Window lockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switches on the each passen-ger’s door or the switches on the driv-er’s door that control each passenger’swindow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passenger’s windowscannot be operated.

PS12524

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

! Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure he or she op-erates the windows safely.

! When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

06 12.21


! Be sure to remove the ignition keyor turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position when you leaveyour vehicle.

! Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

Back door

PS12525

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

To open the back door, push the button.

Vehicles with the power door lock sys-tem—Operating the power door lockswitch or wireless remote control simulta-neously locks or unlocks the back door(see “Side doors” on page 20).

When closing the back door, make sureit is securely closed.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 202in Section 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

06 12.21


PS12526

PS12537

When closing the back door, the insidehandle can be used to make the reacheasier.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.

CAUTION

! Keep the back door closed whiledriving. This not only keeps theluggage from being thrown out butalso prevents exhaust gases fromentering the vehicle.

! Push the back door shut from theoutside. Using the inside handle todirectly close the back door couldcause hands, arms or head to becaught in the door, resulting in se-rious injuries.

Hood

PS12528

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

06 12.21


PS12040

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch lever and lift thehood.

PS12530

3. Hold the hood open by inserting thesupport rod into the slot.

To insert the support rod into the slot,move it straight up. If it is moved to theside or toward the inside of the vehicle,it may become detached.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. and return the support rod to its clip−this prevents rattles. Then lower the hoodand make sure it locks into place. If nec-essary, press down gently on the frontedge to lock it.

CAUTION

After inserting the support rod intothe slot, make sure the rod supportsthe hood security from falling downon to your head or body.

NOTICE

Be sure to return the support rod toits clip before closing the hood. Clos-ing the hood with the support rod upcould cause the hood to bend.

06 12.21


PS12531

To deter vehicle theft, the system isdesigned to sound an alarm if any ofthe side doors, back door or hood isforcibly unlocked and opened.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights, tail lights andturn signal lights, and turns on the interiorlight.

PS12511

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position and remove it.

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, backdoor and hood.

Use the key to lock the last door.When the back door is the last, turnthe key to the unlock position and thenturn to the door lock position.

The indicator light will remain on when allthe side doors, back door and hood areclosed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm if any ofthe side doors is unlocked or if the backdoor or hood is forcibly opened withoutthe key.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-cally stop and the indicator light will startsflashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resetsthe alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

06 12.21

Theft deterrent system(vehicles sold in Puerto Ricoonly)


Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingtwo ways:

! Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

! Unlock any of the doors with the key.

CANCELLING THE SYSTEM

The system will be cancelled by theabove mentioned 2 ways.

If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,the theft deterrent system has beenalarmed. Check to see if there is anyabnormality with your vehicle.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.The doors should be locked with thekey. Be sure to wait until the indicatorlight goes off or starts flashing.

3. Unlock any side door from the inside.The system should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors, back door and hood.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Fuel tank cap

PS12533

With tachometer

PS12534

Without tachometer

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

06 12.21


PS12535

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever up.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

! Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

! When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

PS12536

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap slowly counterclockwise,then pause slightly before removingit. After removing the cap, hang thetether as shown in the illustration.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened.

When installing the cap, turn it clock-wise until one click is heard, in orderto fully close it. The cap returns slight-ly when your hand is released from thecap after closure, however this doesnot cause any problems.

If the cap is not tightened securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

! Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel spillage inthe event of an accident.

! Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

06 12.21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold−down rear seat 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver and front passenger airbags 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front passenger occupant classification system 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 3


SeatsWhile the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

! Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit ontop of a folded−down seatback, orin the luggage compartment or car-go area. Persons not properlyseated and/or not properly re-strained by seat belts can be se-verely injured in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

! During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,severe injuries can occur in theevent of emergency braking or acollision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

! Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

! Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non−slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

! If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

06 12.21

Front seats——Front seat precautions


Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

! Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

! Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

! Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such change may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbag system to in-flate accidentally, resulting in deathor serious injury.

—Seat adjustment precautions

CAUTION

! Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

! Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

! After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

! After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

! Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat−lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

06 12.21


! While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

—Adjusting front seats

PS13501

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

06 12.21


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

PS13502

For easy access to the rear seat:

1. Lift up the seatback lock release lever.

The seat will slide forward.

2. Move the seat to the front−most posi-tion.

After rear passengers are in, lift up theseatback and return the seat until it locks.

CAUTION

After putting back the seat, try push-ing the seat forward and rearward tomake sure it is secured in place.

CAUTION

! Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving.

! Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

! Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the seat.

! Split seat—After adjusting the seatposition, release the lever and trysliding the seat forward and back-ward to make sure it is locked inposition.


! When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventpersonal injury in a collision orsudden stop:

Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

06 12.21

—Moving passenger’s seat forrear seat entry (3−door models only)

Rear seats——Rear seat precautions


Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

Folding down the rear seatbacks will en-large the luggage compartment. See“—Stowage precautions” on page 202 inSection 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

—Adjusting rear seats

PS13503

Split seat

PS13504

Non−split seat

06 12.21


1. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Pull the lever up. Then lean back to thedesired angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

! Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving.

! Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thepassengers are sitting up straightand well back in the seats. If youare reclined, the lap belt may slidepast your hips and apply restraintforces directly to the abdomen oryour neck may contact the shoulderbelt. In the event of a frontal colli-sion, the more the seat is reclined,the greater the risk of death or per-sonal injury.

! Split seat—After adjusting the seatposition, release the lever and trysliding the seat forward and back-ward to make sure it is locked inposition.


2. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Pull the lever up. Then slide the seatto the desired position with slight bodypressure and release the lever.

Fold−down rear seat

PS13505

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEATS

1. Before folding down the seatback,disconnect the center seat belt toprevent damage.

Insert the key into the hole on thebuckle to release tab 1 (with hook end),and allow the belt to retract.

06 12.21


PS13049

2. Insert the tabs of the center seatbelt into the cover. Make sure thetabs are securely locked in the cov-er.

NOTICE

The seat belt tabs must be stowedbefore you fold the seatback.

PS13506

3. Make sure the outer seat belt passesthrough the hanger when folding theseatback down.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hanger when the seat belt is inuse.

NOTICE

The seat belt must be stowed beforeyou fold the seatback.

PS13507

FOLDING REAR SEATS (split seat)

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-est position.

06 12.21


PS13508

2. Pull the seat position adjusting liverup. Then slide the rear seat fullyforward.

PS13509

3. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-ver up and fold the seatback down.

Each seatback may be folded separately.

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventpersonal injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

! Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

! Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in the properposition and are ready to use.

NOTICE

Do not pull the pocket that stores theseat belt comfort guide when return-ing the seatback to the upright posi-tion.

06 12.21


PS13510

4. Flip over the deck board.

This will enlarge the luggage compartmentas far as the seatbacks. See “Cargo andluggage” on page 202 for precautions toobserve for loading luggage.

PS13511

FOLDING REAR SEAT (non−split seat)

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-est position.

PS13512

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-ver up and fold the seatback down.

Each seatback may be folded separately.

06 12.21


CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventpersonal injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

! Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

! Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in the properposition and are ready to use.

NOTICE

Do not pull the pocket that stores theseat belt comfort guide when return-ing the seatback to the upright posi-tion.

Head restraints

PS13513

Front seat

PS13514

Rear seat (split seat)

PS13515

Rear seat (non−split seat)

06 12.21


For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Rear center head restraint—When an oc-cupant sits on the rear center seat, al-ways pull up the rear center head re-straint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

! Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

! After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

! Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 74 for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

06 12.21

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions


CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

! Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

! Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal collision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or personal in-jury.

! Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or doors.

! Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

! Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belts—they mayseverely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page 251in Section 5.)

! Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

PS13516aTabBuckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

06 12.21

—Fastening front and rearseat belts


When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 74 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

! After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

! Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

PS13517aKeep as low onhips as possible

Take upslack

Too high

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.Position the lap belt as low as possible onyour hips—not on your waist, then adjustit to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

! Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended event. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on hipsas possible.

! Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.

06 12.21


PS13518

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor (5−door models)—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Pull the lock release knob andslide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causeserious injures in a collision.

PS13519a

To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

06 12.21


PS13520

REAR CENTER SEAT BELT

The rear center seat belt is a 3−point typerestraint with 2 buckles. Both seat beltbuckles must be correctly located and se-curely latched for proper operation.

Make sure buckle 1 is securely latchedfor ready use of the center seat belt.

PS13521

Two buckles and tabs for rear centerseat beltThe two tabs have different shapes to pre-vent the belt from being buckled in thewrong place.

Buckle 1—Matches the tab with thehooked endBuckle 2—Matches the tab with theconcave end

CAUTION

Make sure the both buckles are cor-rectly located and securely latched.Failure to properly match the buckleand tab may cause serious injury incase of an accident or a collision.

06 12.21


PS13522

To release the hooked end tab, insert thekey into the hole on buckle 1 and allowthe belt to retract.

PS13523

CAUTION

Do not use the rear center seat beltwith either buckle released. Fasteningonly the shoulder belt or lap belt maycause serious personal injury in caseof a sudden braking or a collision.

PS13049

STOWING THE REAR CENTER SEATBELT TABS

Insert the tabs of the center seat beltinto the cover. Make sure the tabs aresecurely locked in the cover.

Seat belt must be stowed before you foldthe seatback.

NOTICE

Stow the rear center seat belt tabswhen not in use.

06 12.21

—Stowing the rear center seatbelt


PS13524

PULLING OUT THE REAR CENTER SEATBELT TABS

Push the tab and then pull the tabs outfrom the cover.

—Seat belt comfort guide

PS13525

The center shoulder belt comfort guidefor the rear seat center position willprovide added seat belt comfort forchildren who have outgrown child re-straints and for small adults. When thecenter shoulder belt is inserted throughthe guide, the comfort guide pulls thebelt away from the neck and head of anoccupant.

To use the comfort guide, do as fol-lows.

PS13526b

Front of vehicle

Split seat

Seat belt comfort guide is stored in thepocket on the right side of the left rearseatback.

06 12.21


PS13600a

Front of vehicle

Non−split seat

Seat belt comfort guide is stored in thepocket behind the rear seatback.

PS13597

Split seat

PS13601

Non−split seat

INSTALLING THE COMFORT GUIDE

1. Pull the comfort guide from thepocket.

06 12.21


PS13528a

2. Pinch the two edges of the shoulderbelt for the rear seat center positionwith your fingers and slide the beltpast the slot of the guide as shownabove. At this time, the elastic cordmust be behind the seat belt.

CAUTION

Make sure the belt is not twisted andthat it lies flat. The elastic cord mustbe behind the belt and the guidemust be on the front.

PS13529

3. Buckle, position and release the seatbelt. (For wearing the seat belt, see“—Fastening front and rear seatbelts” on page 43 in this Section.)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center of theshoulder. The belt should be keptaway from the neck, and should notfall off the shoulder. Failure to ob-serve these precautions could reducethe effectiveness of the seat belt inan accident, causing death or seriousinjury.

PS13598

Split seat

PS13604

Non−split seat

06 12.21


REMOVING AND STORING THECOMFORT GUIDE

Pinch the two edges of the seat belttogether so that you can slide them outof the guide. Store the guide with theelastic cord into the pocket.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, remove and store thecomfort guide in its pocket when it isnot in use.

—Seat belt extenderIf your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofpersonal injury.

! Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

PS13531

! If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

06 12.21


! Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disconnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front passengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, causing death or seriousinjury in the event of collision.

! Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

! Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

LS13092

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

06 12.21


As far as the seat belt extender on thefront passenger side is concerned, do notfail to disconnect the extender from theseat belt after the above operation in or-der to activate the front passenger airbagcorrectly when getting into the vehiclenext time.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

! After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt and the seat belt extend-er are not twisted.

! Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

—Seat belt pretensioners

PS13532

The driver and front passenger seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact, the front seat belts are quicklydrawn back by the retractors so that thebelts snugly restrain the occupants.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er will not activate if no passenger isdetected in the front passenger seat bythe front passenger occupant classificationsystem. However, the front passenger’sseat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 70 in thisSection.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

06 12.21


PS13533

The seat belt pretensioner system con-sists mainly of the following componentsand their locations are shown in the il-lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-cator lights

4. Front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch

5. Front passenger occupant classificationsystem (ECU and sensors)

6. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

7. Airbag sensor assembly

The seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non−toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe seat belt pretensioner assemblies,airbag sensor or surrounding area orwiring. Failure to follow these instruc-tion may prevent the seat belt preten-sioners from activating correctly,cause sudden operation of the systemor disable the system, which couldresult in death or serious injury. Con-sult your Toyota dealer about any re-pair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theseat belt pretensioners in somecases.

! Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

! Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

! Modification of the suspension sys-tem

! Modification of the front end struc-ture

! Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

! Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

06 12.21


SP13504

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the seat belt pretensioners areoperating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbagsensors, side and curtain shield airbagsensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, front passengeroccupant classification system, “AIRBAGON” indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light, front passenger’s seat beltbuckle switch, seat belt pretensionerassemblies, inflators, interconnectingwiring and power sources. (For details,see “Service reminder indicators andwarning buzzers” on page 114 in Section1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

! The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on for more than 6seconds or flashes.

! The light comes on or starts flashingwhile driving.

! If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunctionor activation of the relevant seat beltpretensioner.

! The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.

06 12.21


PS13534

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

! The front part of the vehicle (shadedin the illustration) was involved in anaccident that was not severe enough tocause the seat belt pretensioners tooperate.

! Either seat belt pretensioner assemblyor surrounding area is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

PS13535

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) airbags are designed to providefurther protection for the driver andfront passenger in addition to the pri-mary safety protection provided by theseat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCEDAIRBAGS” designed based on US motorvehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). Theairbag system controls airbag deploymentpower for the driver and front passenger.The driver airbag system consists of thedriver seat’s position sensor etc. The frontpassenger’s airbag system consists of thefront passenger occupant classificationsensor etc.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS airbags work with the seat beltsto help reduce injury by inflating. The SRSairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s head or chestcaused by hitting the vehicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will notactivate if there is no passenger sitting inthe front passenger seat. However, thefront passenger airbag may deploy if lug-gage is put in the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up, regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 70 in thisSection.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

06 12.21

SRS driver and frontpassenger airbags


CAUTION

! The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. For in-structions and precautions concern-ing the seat belt system, see “Seatbelts” on page 42 in this Section.

! Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 74 in thisSection.

The SRS airbags are designed to deployin severe (usually frontal) collisionswhere the magnitude and duration ofthe forward deceleration of the vehicleexceeds the designed threshold level.

The SRS airbags will deploy if the severi-ty of the impact is above the designedthreshold level, comparable to an approxi-mate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when thevehicle has the impact straight into a fixedbarrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS airbags and the seatbelt pretensioners may not activate toge-ther.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

06 12.21


PS13536Collision from the rear

Collision from the side Vehicle rollover

The SRS airbags are not generally de-signed to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. But, whenever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS airbags may oc-cur.

PS13537Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard surface

Falling into orjumping over adeep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS airbags may also deploy if aserious impact occurs to the undersideof your vehicle. Some examples areshown in the illustration.

PS13538

The SRS airbag system consists mainly ofthe following components, and their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. Airbag module for driver (airbag andinflator)



5. Airbag module for front passenger (air-bag and inflator)



06 12.21


8. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

9. Driver’s seat position sensor


The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.If an impact results in a forward decelera-tion beyond the designed threshold level,the system triggers the airbag inflators. Atthis time a chemical reaction in the inflat-ors very quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward mo-tion of the occupants. The airbags thenquickly deflate, so that there is no ob-struction of the driver’s vision should it benecessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to: avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

! The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

! The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

! All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page32 in this Section.

06 12.21


PS13539

! Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.

PS13540

! Toyota strongly recommends that allinfants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

! Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 74 in this Sec-tion.

PS13541

! Do not put anything or any part ofyour body on or in front of thedashboard or steering wheel padthat houses the front airbag sys-tem. They might restrict inflation orcause death or serious injury asthey are projected rearward by theforce of deploying airbags. Like-wise, the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

06 12.21


! Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag cover, frontpassenger airbag or airbag sensorassembly. Doing so may prevent thefront airbag system from activatingcorrectly, cause sudden activationof the system or disable the sys-tem, which could result in death orserious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with physical disability, con-sult your Toyota dealer. If may dan-gerously interfere with the SRS frontairbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS airbag system in some cases.



! Modification of the front end struc-ture

! Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

! Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

SP13504

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS airbags are operatingproperly.

06 12.21



If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.



The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light will come on if there is amalfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.

PS13542


! The SRS airbags have been inflated.

! The front part of the vehicle (shadedin the illustration) was involved in anaccident that was not severe enough tocause the SRS airbags to inflate.

! The pad part of the steering wheel orfront passenger airbag cover (shadedin the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

PS13543

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and rear outside passengers inaddition to the primary safety protec-tion provided by the seat belts.

06 12.21

SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags


In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s chest and theSRS curtain shield airbags help reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s front pas-senger’s or rear outside passenger’s head.

The SRS side airbag on the passengerseat will not activate if there is no pas-senger sitting in the front passenger seat.However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put inthe seat, or the seat belt is buckled upregardless of the presence of the occu-pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-ger occupant classification system, see“Front passenger occupant classificationsystem” on page 70 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-senger side are activated even with nopassenger in the front seat or rear outsideseat.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-vate even when the side airbags are notactivated.


CAUTION

! The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver, frontpassenger and rear outside passen-ger seat belt systems. To ensuremaximum protection in an accident,the driver and all passengers in thevehicle must wear their seat beltsproperly. Wearing a seat belt prop-erly during an accident reduces thechances of death or serious injuryor being thrown out of the vehicle.For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seat belt system,see “Seat belts” on page 42 in thisSection.

! Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the door or the area of theseat, front pillar, rear pillar or roofside rail from which the SRS sideairbag and curtain shield airbagdeploy even if he/she is a childseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the SRS side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact of the deploy-ing airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the occupant.

! Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page74 in this Section.

06 12.21


PS13544

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not activate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment area suffers a se-vere impact from the side.


PS13545Collision from the rear

Collision from the front Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are not generally designed toinflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low−speed sidecollision.

PS13546

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.





5. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)

06 12.21


7. Curtain shield airbag sensors

8. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non−toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happen in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the frontand rear pillars, and roof side rail may behot for several minutes, but the airbagsthemselves will not be hot. The airbagsare designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver, front passenger andrear outside passengers must:

! Wear their seat belts properly.

! Remain properly seated with theirbacks upright and against the seatsat all times.

PS13547

! Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

! Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag, and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.

06 12.21


PS13548

! Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead closer to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

PS13549

! Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe passenger seat, facing the pas-senger’s side door, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

PS13550

! Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windowssince the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

06 12.21


PS13551

! Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

PS13552

! Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andrear pillars, roof side rail and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

! Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

! Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

! Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery or the seats with sideairbags. Such changes may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

06 12.21


! Do not disassemble or repair thefront and rear pillars and roof siderail containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with physical disability, con-sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-gerously interfere with the SRS frontairbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.



! Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

! Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

SP13504

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are operating properly.

06 12.21



If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.



The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light will come on if there is amalfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.

PS13553


! Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags have been inflated.

! The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

! The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

! The portion of the front pillars, rearpillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-ding) containing the curtain shield air-bags inside (shaded in the illustration)is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

06 12.21


Your vehicle is equipped with a frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem. This system detects the conditions1—4 (Shown in the table on page 72).Based on these conditions, the systemsbelow are activated or deactivated:

! Front passenger airbag

! Side airbag on the front passengerseat

! Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er

The system monitors the weight andload on the front passenger seat, andthe seat belt buckle switch to determineconditions 1—4.

In order to ensure the system detectsthe conditions correctly:

! Do not place a heavy load on the frontpassenger seat.

! Do not attach a commercial seatbacktable or other heavy item to the backof the front passenger seat.

! Do not apply pressure to the front pas-senger seat by resting hands or legson the seatback.

PS13554

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights indicate the actuation ofthe front passenger airbag, side airbagon the front passenger seat and frontpassenger’s seat belt pretensioner.

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights will be illuminated ini-tially when the ignition key is turned tothe “ON” position. After about 4 sec-onds, they will go off. After that, thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem operates and judges which indi-cator light be illuminated.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will beilluminated when the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position with the condition 2 inthe table shown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-tion system determines that person ofadult size sits in the front passenger seatbut the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, one of the following is likelyto have occurred:

! A rear passenger lifts the front passen-ger seat cushion with their legs.

! Objects are placed under the front pas-senger seat.

! The front passenger seatback is incontact with the rear seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects thepresence or absence of a person of adultsize sitting in the front passenger seat,make sure that none of the above occur.

06 12.21

Front passenger occupantclassification system


Make sure that the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated when a person of adultsize is seated in the front passenger seat.If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, ask the passenger to sit upstraight, well back in the seat, and withthe seat belt worn correctly. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light remainsilluminated, either ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat, or if that is notpossible, move the front passenger seatfully rearward.

PS13555

With tachometer

PS13556

Without tachometer

The SRS warning light and “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light will come on ifthere is a malfunction in the front pas-senger occupant classification system.Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

06 12.21


Condition and operation in the front passenger classification system

Condition detectedby the front

passenger occupantclassification

system

Indicator/warning light Devices

“AIRBAG ON” and“AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights

SRS warninglight

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltreminder

light

Frontpassenger

airbag

Side airbagon the frontpassenger

seat

Curtain shieldairbag in the

frontpassenger

side

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltpretensioner

1. Adult∗1 “AIRBAG ON” Off Flashing∗4 Activated

2. Child∗2 or childrestraint system∗3 “AIRBAG OFF”∗5 Off Flashing∗4 Deactivated

Activated

Activated

3. Unoccupied Not illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated

4. There is amalfunction in thesystem

“AIRBAG OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should onlybe installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 74 in this Section as for installingthe child restraint system.)

∗4: In the event that the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.∗5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 74 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

06 12.21


CAUTION

To avoid potential death or seriousinjury when the front passenger occu-pant classification system does notdetect the conditions correctly, ob-serve the following.

! Do not recline the front passengerseat seatback so that it interfereswith a rear seat as it may cause the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light be il-luminated. If the seatback interfereswith the rear seat, return the seat-back to a position where it doesnot interfere with the rear seat.

Keep the front passenger seatbackas upright as possible when the ve-hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-back excessively may lessen the ef-fectiveness of the seat belt system.

! Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disconnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front passengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, which could cause deathor serious injury in the event ofcollision.

! If an adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light should beilluminated. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated, askthe passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, feet on thefloor, and with the seat belt worncorrectly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remainsilluminated, either ask thepassenger to move to the rear seat,or if that is not possible, move thefront passenger seat fully rearward.

! Wear the seat belt properly.

! Make sure the front passenger’sseat belt tab has not been left in-serted into the buckle before some-one sits in the front passengerseat.

! Do not place a heavy load on thefront passenger seat.

! Do not apply pressure to the frontpassenger seat by resting hands orlegs on the seatback.

06 12.21


! Do not let a rear passenger lift thefront passenger seat with their feetor press on the seatback with theirlegs.

! Do not put objects under the frontpassenger seat.

! Do not attach a commercial seat-back table or other heavy item tothe back of the front passengerseat.

! Child restraint systems installed onthe rear seat should not contact thefront seatbacks.

! When it is unavoidable to install theforward−facing child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger seat,install the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in theproper order. (As for the installationorder, see “—Installation with seatbelt” on page 77 in this Section.)

! Do not modify or remove the frontseats.

! Do not kick the front passengerseat or subject it to severe impact.Otherwise, the SRS warning lightmay come on to indicate a malfunc-tion of the detection system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer im-mediately.

The “AIRBAG ON” indicator light may beilluminated (the front passenger airbag andside airbag on the front passenger seatmay deploy) even if observing the abovecautions, when a child sits in, or a for-ward−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passenger seat. Re-fer to all the cautions in this Section and“Child restraint” on page 74 in this Sec-tion.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 42 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

! For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

06 12.21

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions


! Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

! Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the force ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag can cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

! A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible even if the “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light is illuminated,because the front passenger airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, thechild may be killed or seriously in-jured.

! On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, frontor rear pillar or roof side rail fromwhich the side airbags or curtainshield airbags deploy even if thechild is seated in the child restraintsystem. It is dangerous if the sideairbag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

! Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

! Make sure you have complied withall installation instructions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand that the system is properly se-cured. If it is not secured properly,it may cause death or serious injuryto the child in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

06 12.21


—Child restraint systemA child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 89 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchoragesapproved for your vehicle may also beused. See “—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages” on page 92 inthis Section.

PS13557

(A) Infant seat

PS13558

(B) Convertible seat

06 12.21

—Types of child restraintsystem


PS13559

(C) Booster seat

PS13560

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.

PS13561

CAUTION

! Split seat: When installing a rear−facing child restraint system in therear seat, move the rear seat to therear−most lock position to preventthe child restraint system from in-terfering with the front seat. Other-wise, the child restraint system maynot be properly secured. In theevent of an accident, this maycause death or serious injury.

06 12.21

—Installation with seat belt


PS13562

CAUTION


PS13563

! Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of thefront seats. Otherwise, the child orfront seat occupant(s) may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

! If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

PS13564

Same angleSame position

! Split seat: When installing a childrestraint system in the rear seatcenter position, adjust both seatcushions to the same position andalign both seatbacks at the sameangle. Otherwise, the child restraintsystem cannot be securely re-strained and this may cause deathor serious injuries in a collision.

06 12.21


PS13565

To install the infant seat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

! After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.

! Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.

! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the child re-straint system on the seat until theseat belt is fixed.

PS13566

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

06 12.21


PS13567

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

PS13568

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

PS13569

To remove the infant seat:Press the buckle release button and allowthe belt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready to workfor an adult or older child passenger.

06 12.21


PS13570

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-ward−facing or rear−facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theapplicable age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.

Install the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat only when it is un-avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger occupant classificationsystem. In order to activate the occupantclassification system correctly, install theforward−facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in the followingorder:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion.

2. Move the front passenger seat to therearward position.

3. If you must install the child restraintsystem on the front passenger seat,put the child restraint system puttingyour weight on the front passengerseat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seatbelt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended. To hold the seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-tem and secure the child, complyingwith the instructions provided by thechild restraint system manufacturer.

06 12.21


The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light shouldbe illuminated when the ignition key is inthe “ON” position and the child is in thechild restraint system after following theseprocedures. The “AIRBAG OFF” indicatorlight indicates the SRS front passengerairbag and side airbag on the passengerside will not deploy. If the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated, do the follow-ing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. When reinstalling a child restraint sys-tem, make sure the seatback does notpress the child restraint system intothe seat cushion. If this occurs, adjustthe seatback angle slightly.

4. Then make sure the head restraint isnot pressing the child restraint systeminto the seat cushion. If this occurs,raise the head restraint.

5. Turn the ignition on again.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light shouldbe illuminated. If the “AIRBAG ON” indica-tor light is illuminated when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position, thenthe SRS front passenger airbag and sideairbag on the passenger side may deployin an accident. Do not drive the vehiclein this condition. Remove the child re-straint system and contact your Toyotadealer.

CAUTION

! Never install a rear−facing childrestraint system on the frontpassenger seat. A forward−facingchild restraint system should onlybe installed on the front passengerseat when unavoidable. If you mustinstall the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat, put theseat in its most rearward position,and install the forward−facing childrestraint system in the properorder. Otherwise, the frontpassenger occupant classificationsystem cannot detect the presenceof the child restraint system andthe front passenger airbag and sideairbag on the front passenger seatcould deploy.

PS13561

CAUTION

! Split seat: When installing a rear−facing child restraint system in therear seat, move the rear seat to therear−most lock position to preventthe child restraint system from in-terfering with the front seat. Other-wise, the child restraint system maynot be properly secured. In theevent of an accident, this maycause death or serious injury.

06 12.21


PS13571

CAUTION


PS13572

Move seatfully back


! On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, frontor rear pillar or roof side rail fromwhich the side airbags or curtainshield airbags deploy even if thechild is seated in the child restraintsystem. If is dangerous if the sideairbag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

06 12.21


PS13573


! If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

PS13574

Sameangle

Same position

! Split seat: When installing a childrestraint system in the rear seatcenter position, adjust both seatcushions to the same position andalign both seatbacks at the sameangle. Otherwise, the child restraintsystem cannot be securely re-strained and this may cause deathor serious injuries in a collision.

PS13575

To install the forward−facing convertibleseat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

For instructions concerning the installationof the rear−facing convertible seat, see“(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION” onpage 77.

06 12.21


CAUTION




PS13576

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

PS13577

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

06 12.21


PS13578

CAUTION


PS13579

To remove the convertible seat:Press the buckle release button and allowthe belt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready to workfor an adult or older child passenger.

PS13580

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for-ward−facing position only.

06 12.21


PS13581

Move seatfully back

CAUTION


! On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, frontor rear pillar or roof side rail fromwhich the side airbags or curtainshield airbags deploy even if thechild is seated in the child restraintsystem. It is dangerous if the sideairbag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

PS13582

Sameangle

Same position

! When installing a child restraintsystem in the rear seat center posi-tion, adjust both seat cushions tothe same position and align bothseatbacks at the same angle. Other-wise, the child restraint system can-not be securely restrained and thismay cause death or serious injuriesin a collision.

06 12.21


PS13583

To install the booster seat:

Sit the child on a booster seat. Run thelap and shoulder belt through or aroundthe booster seat and across the child fol-lowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab into thebuckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 42 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

! Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s shoulder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

! Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon a child’s hips as possible.

! For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.




06 12.21


PS13584

To remove the booster seat:Press the buckle release button and allowthe belt to retract.

—Using a top strap

PS13585

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

PS13586

Symbol

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor brackets behind the rearseatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachrear seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations ofuser ready anchor brackets.

06 12.21


TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the deck board and luggagestorage box. (See “Luggage storagebox” on page 175 in Section 1−10.)

2. Remove the luggage cover. (See“Luggage cover” on page 175 inSection 1−10.) PS13587

Split seat

PS13588

Non−split seat

3. Remove the head restraint.

06 12.21


PS13589

4. Securely fasten the child restraintsystem with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 74 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

PS13590

5. Non−split seat only—Replace the headrestraint.

06 12.21


PS13591

The lower anchorages for the child re-straint system interfaced with theFMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specificationare installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the gapbetween the seat cushion and seatback ofboth outside rear seats.

Child restraint system interfaced with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed with these anchorages. Inthis case, it is not necessary to fix thechild restraint system with a seat belt onthe vehicle.

PS13592Mostuprightposition

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback and back itto the most upright position until itlocks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked secure-ly.

PS13593

Canada only

Type A

06 12.21

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages


PS13594

Canada only

Type B

1. Widen the gap between the seatcushion and seatback slightly andconfirm the position of the lower an-chorages below the button on theseatback.

2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint systemindicates the presence of a lower connec-tor system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 89 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

! When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

! Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

! Split seat—When using the loweranchorages for the child restraintsystem, ensure that the seat ismoved to the rear−most position,with the seatback close to the childrestraint system.

! After securing the child restraintsystem, never slide or recline theseat.


06 12.21


06 12.21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsTilt steering wheel 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirrors 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 4


Tilt steering wheel

PS14501

To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, push down thelock release lever, tilt the steeringwheel to the desired angle and returnthe lever to its original position.

CAUTION

! Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

! After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

Outside rear view mirrors—

PS14502

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

06 12.21


CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries. PS14503

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

06 12.21

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol


—Folding rear view mirrors

PS14504

The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-ward until you hear the click.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

NOTICE

Do not push backward more than theclick. It may damage the mirror orvehicle.

PS14505

Adjust the mirror so you can just seethe rear of your vehicle in the mirror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

06 12.21

Anti−glare inside rear viewmirror


CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in personal death or seriousinjuries.

Sun visors

PS14506

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swingdown the sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swingdown the sun visor, remove it from thehook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-tion 2).

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,extend the plate at the end of the visor(position 3).

CAUTION

Do not extend the plate at the end ofthe sun visor when the visor is in theposition 1. It can cover the anti−glareinside rear view mirror and obstructthe rear view.

06 12.21


Vanity mirrors

PS14507

To use the vanity mirrors, swing downthe sun visor and slide the cover.

06 12.21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior light 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window wiper and washer 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window defogger 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 5


Headlights and turn signals

PS15501

Except for Canada

PS15502

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

For Canada—The tail light indicator (greenlight) on the instrument panel will tell youthat the tail lights are on.

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Except for Canada—The headlight lowbeam indicator light (green light) on theinstrument panel will tell you that the lowbeams are on.

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer will remind you to turn the lightsoff when the driver’s door is opened if youremove the key with the headlight switchon.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime running light system(on some models)

The daytime running light system canmake it easier for others to see the frontof your vehicle during the day. This sys-tem can be helpful in many different driv-ing conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn andbefore sunset.

This system will make your headlightscome on at a reduced brightness when:

! The engine is running.

! The parking brake is released.

! The headlight/turn signal lever knob isin the “OFF” position.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn theheadlights to full intensity for night driving.

06 12.21


PS15503

High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

PS15504

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 288 in Section 7−3.

Emergency flashers

PS15505

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

06 12.21


NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

Instrument panel light control

PS15506

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the dial.

With the dial turned fully up, the intensityof the instrument panel lights will not bereduced even when the tail lights/head-lights are turned on.

Front fog lights

PS15507

To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come onwhen the head lights are on low beam.

06 12.21


Interior light

PS15508

To turn on the interior light, slide theswitch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when anyside doors are opened. The light goes offwhen all the side doors are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch isin the “DOOR” position and any of theside doors is opened, the light will comeon. After all the side doors are closed, thelight remains on for about 15 secondsbefore fading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When theswitch is in the “DOOR” position, and theignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, thelight will come on. The light remains onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes off immediately.

! All the side doors are closed when theignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

! Vehicles with the power door lock sys-tem—All the side doors and back doorare closed and locked.

Vehicles with the power door lock sys-tem—When the driver’s door is unlockedusing either the key or the wireless re-mote control, the interior light will comeon and remain on for about 15 secondsbefore fading out.

Vehicles with the power door lock systemand vehicles sold in Puerto Rico—Thefollowing adjustments can be made in thissystem. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

! Vehicles with the power door lock sys-tem—Cancelling the door key or thewireless remote control linked operation

! Cancelling the ignition switch linked op-eration

! Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the side door isleft opened with the switch at the “DOOR”position for 20 minutes or more.

06 12.21


Personal lights

PS15509

To turn on the personal light, push thelens. To turn the light off, push thelens once again.

PS15510

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,push the lever up and release it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 288 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure thatthe washer nozzles do not becomeblocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,contact your Toyota dealer to have thevehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

06 12.21

Windshield wipers and washer


PS15511

To turn on the rear window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward. (Position 1)


To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 2 or 3). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it. The rear window wip-er operates while the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 288 inSection 7−3.

NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if therear window is dry. It may scratch theglass.

Rear window defogger

PS15512a

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the surface.An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethe defogger is operating.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefogger off.

Make sure you turn the defogger off whenthe window is clear. Leaving the defoggeron for a long time could cause the batteryto discharge, especially during stop−and−go driving. The defogger is not designedfor drying rain water or for melting snow.

06 12.21

Rear window wiper and washer


NOTICE

! To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switch offwhen the engine is not running.

! When cleaning the inside of therear window, be careful not toscratch or damage the heater wiresor connectors.

06 12.21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature indicator and warning light 111. . . . . . . . . Tachometer 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 6


Fuel gauge

PS16501a

With tachometer

PS16502a

Without tachometer

The gauge works when the ignitionswitch is on and indicates the approxi-mate quantity of fuel remaining in thetank.

Nearly full—Indicator at “F”Nearly empty—Indicator at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

PS16503

Low fuel level warning light

With tachometer

PS16504

Low fuel level warning light

Without tachometer

06 12.21


If the low fuel level warning light flashes,fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.Further fuel reduction makes the lightblink quicker.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

PS16505a

With tachometer

PS16506a

Without tachometer

1. Low engine coolant temperature indica-tor light

2. High engine coolant temperature warn-ing light

The indicator and warning lights indi-cate the engine coolant temperaturewhen the ignition switch is on. The en-gine operating temperature will varywith changes in weather and engineload.

The high engine coolant temperature warn-ing light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position. Aftera few seconds, the light will go off.

If your engine coolant temperature is coolwith the ignition switch on, the low enginecoolant temperature indicator light comeson. If it keeps lighting on with the enginefully warmed, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible to service the ve-hicle.

If the high engine coolant temperaturewarning light flashes, your engine is toohot. If your vehicle overheats, stop yourvehicle and allow the engine to cool.

06 12.21

Engine coolant temperatureindicator and warning light


Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

! Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

! Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

! Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

! Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

! Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

! Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If yourvehicle overheats” on page 227 inSection 4.

Tachometer

PS16507

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator get segmentinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

Odometer and two trip meters

PS16513

With tachometer

06 12.21


PS16514

Without tachometer

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Shows two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—It can reset thetwo trip meters to zero, and alsochange the meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

06 12.21


Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) or If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(Indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)

(Indicator and buzzer)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(f) or Fill up tank.

06 12.21



(g) Stop and check.

(h) orTake vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immedi-ately and contact Toyota dealer.

(i) Close all side doors and back door.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(l) Add washer fluid.

(m) Replace engine oil.

06 12.21



(n) Stop and check.

(o) Key reminderbuzzer

Remove key.

(p) Light reminderbuzzer

Turn off lights.

06 12.21


(a) Brake System Warning Light

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.

! When the parking brake is applied...

Vehicles with anti−lock brake system—

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position even after the parking brakeis released.

! When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

! The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

Vehicles with anti−lock brake system—

! The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, immediately stop your vehicleat a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer

! The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may notwork properly and your stoppingdistance will become longer. De-press the brake pedal firmly andbring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

Vehicles with anti−lock brake sys-tem—

! The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes andbuzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt isnot fastened. Unless the driver fastens thebelt, the light keeps flashing and thebuzzer stops after about 6 seconds.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,the buzzer will sound for 10 seconds.Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,the buzzer will sound in a different tonefor 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speeddrops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the buzzerwill continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer stillsounds, make sure the front passenger’sseat belt is fastened.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat BeltReminder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tohave the front passenger buckle up theseat belt.

06 12.21


Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes if apassenger sits in the front passenger seatand does not fasten the seat belt.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,the buzzer will sound for 10 seconds.Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,the buzzer will sound in a different tonefor 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speeddrops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the buzzerwill continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer stillsounds, make sure the driver’s seat beltis fastened.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight, the reminder light may flash andbuzzer to sound.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

(d) Charging System Warning Light

This warning light comes on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” position,and goes off when the engine is started.

When there are problems in the chargingsystem while the engine is running, thewarning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warninglight comes on while the engine isrunning, malfunctions such as the en-gine drive belt being broken may haveoccurred. If the warning light comeson, immediately stop the vehicle in asafe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

(e) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the engine starts. Thismeans that the warning light system isoperating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

! Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

! Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

! There is a problem somewhere in theengine, emission control system, elec-tronic throttle control system, automatictransmission electrical system or warn-ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe engine off.

06 12.21


CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state emis-sion inspection if the malfunction indicatorlamp remains on. Contact your Toyotadealer to check your vehicle’s emissioncontrol system and OBD (On−Board Diag-nostics) system before taking your vehiclefor the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 260in Section 6.

(f) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light flashes when the fuel level inthe tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may flash earlier than usual.

(g) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

(h) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if the system malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.


! The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


06 12.21


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake systemwarning light, immediately stop yourvehicle at a safe place and contactyour Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the sidedoors and back door are completelyclosed.

(j) Electric Power Steering SystemWarning Light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the elec-tric power steering system warning lightworks properly, the light turns off after afew seconds. If the system has malfunc-tions, the light comes on again.

If the following conditions occur, thisindicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warninglight system. Contact your Toyota deal-er as soon as possible to service thevehicle.

! The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on.

! The light stays on while you are driv-ing.

The warning light turning on while racingthe engine for a long time may not indi-cate malfunction. To turn off the light, re-start the engine and start driving.

CAUTION

If the electric power steering systemwarning light comes on, take your ve-hicle to Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. In this case, more effort isrequired for the steering wheel toturn than usual. Drive your vehiclewhile firmly gripping the steeringwheel.

(k) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.After about 6 seconds, the light will gooff. This means the system of the air-bags and front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

The warning light system monitors the air-bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, front passenger occu-pant classification system, “AIRBAG ON”indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicatorlight, front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies,inflators, interconnecting wiring and powersources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle.



06 12.21


(l) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light

The light warns that the windshield washerfluid level is too low. Add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity. (For instructions,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 288 inSection 7−3.)

(m) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight (Except for Canada)

This light acts as a reminder to replacethe engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500miles) after the engine oil replacement,this light illuminates for about 3 secondsand then flashes for about 12 secondswith the ignition key turned to the “ON”position. If you continue driving withoutreplacing the engine oil, and if thedistance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000miles), the light will come on. The lightwill remain on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad conditions. If the light comes on,replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after theengine oil replacement. Reset the systemby the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “OFF” posi-tion with the trip A reading shown. (Fordetails, see “Odometer and two tripmeters” on page 112 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion while holding down the trip meterreset knob.

Hold down the knob for at least 5seconds. The indicator light flashes andthe bars displayed in the odometerdisappear gradually. The odometerindicates “000000” and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light willcontinue flashing.

(n) High Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The light operates to warn that the engineis almost overheating.

The high engine coolant temperature warn-ing light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position. Aftera few seconds, the light will go off.

If your engine coolant temperature is coolwith the ignition switch on, the low enginecoolant temperature indicator light comeson. If it keeps lighting on with the enginefully warmed, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible to service the ve-hicle.

If the high engine coolant temperaturewarning light flashes, your engine is toohot. If your vehicle overheats, stop yourvehicle and allow the engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

! Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

! Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

! Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

06 12.21


NOTICE

! Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

! Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If yourvehicle overheats” on page 227 inSection 4.

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to removethe key when you open the driver’s doorwith the ignition key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

(p) Light Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer will sound if the headlightswitch is left on and the driver’s door isopened with the key removed from theignition switch.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and low windshield wash-er fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors or backdoor.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close all the side doors and back door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.

All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The “ABS” warning light, en-gine oil replacement reminder light,high engine coolant temperature warn-ing light and electric power steeringsystem warning light goes off after afew seconds. The SRS warning lightgoes off after about 6 seconds.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

06 12.21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual transmission 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 7


Ignition switch

PS17501

“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see Section 3.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn the keyfrom “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. Onvehicles with an automatic transmission,the selector lever must be put in the “P”position before pushing the key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—Once you remove the key, the engine im-mobilizer system is automatically set. (See“Engine immobilizer system” on page 13in Section 1−2.)

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

Approximately five hours after the engineis turned off, you may hear sound comingfrom underneath the luggage compartmentfor several minutes. This is normal opera-tion and does not indicate a malfunction.(See “Leak detection pump” on page viii.)

It is not a malfunction if the needles onall meters move slightly when the key isturned to the “ACC”, “ON” or “START”position.

CAUTION

For manual transmission:

Never remove the key when the ve-hicle is moving, as this will lock thesteering wheel and result in loss ofsteering control.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

06 12.21


Automatic transmissionYour automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

P: Parking, engine starting and key re-moval

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrivepossible)

3: Engine braking (shifting into overdrivenot possible)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

06 12.21

PS17502

Selector lever

With the brake pedal depressed(The ignition switch must be in“ON” position.)

Shift normally


(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” in Section 3. Thetransmission must be in “P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fueleconomy and quieter driving. If the enginecoolant temperature is low, the transmis-sion will not shift into overdrive gear evenin the “D” position.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

! Shift into the “3” position. The trans-mission will downshift to third gear andengine braking will be enabled.

! Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than 86 km/h (53 mph), andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

! Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than 43 km/h (26 mph), andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

(d) Using “2” and “L” positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, youcan start the vehicle in motion as with thelever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “2”, the vehiclewill start in first gear and automaticallyshift to second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

06 12.21


NOTICE

! Be careful not to over−rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

“2” 103 km/h (64 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . “L” 56 km/h (34 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . .

! Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“2” or “L” position. This may causesevere automatic transmission dam-age from overheating. To preventsuch damage, “D” or “3” positionshould be used in hill climbing orhard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up fully tosecurely apply the parking brake.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(g) Good driving practice

! If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between third gear and over-drive gears when climbing a gentleslope, shift the selector lever to the “3”position. Be sure to shift the selectorlever to the “D” position immediatelyafterward.

! When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse “D” position. The selector levermust be in the “3” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(h) If you cannot move the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 244 in Section 4.

06 12.21


Manual transmission

PS17503

The shift pattern is conventional asshown above.

Press the clutch pedal down fully whileshifting, and then release it slowly. Do notrest your foot on the pedal while driving,because it will cause clutch trouble. Donot use the clutch to hold the vehiclewhen stopped on an uphill grade—use theparking brake.

Recommended shifting speeds

The transmission is fully synchronized andupshifting or downshifting is easy.

For the best compromise between fueleconomy and vehicle performance, youshould upshift or downshift at the followingspeeds:

Low altitude—1219 m (4000 ft.) or lower

gear km/h (mph)1 to 2 or 2 to 1 24 (15)2 to 3 or 3 to 2 40 (25)3 to 4 or 4 to 3 64 (40)4 to 5 / 5 to 4 72/64 (45/40)

High altitude—Higher than 1219 m (4000 ft.)

Upshiftinggear km/h (mph)

1 to 2 24 (15)2 to 3 64 (40)3 to 4 75 (47)4 to 5 87 (54)

Downshiftinggear km/h (mph)

2 to 1 24 (15)3 to 2 40 (25)4 to 3 64 (40)5 to 4 64 (40)

Downshift to the appropriate gear if accel-eration is needed when you are cruisingbelow the above downshifting speeds.

Upshifting too soon or downshifting toolate will cause lugging, and possibly ping-ing. Regularly revving the engine to maxi-mum speed in each gear will cause ex-cessive engine wear and high fuelconsumption.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slowertraffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-essary. Make sure you observe the follow-ing maximum allowable speeds in eachgear:

gear km/h (mph)1 51 (31)2 95 (59)3 139 (86)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are goingfaster than the maximum allowablespeed for the next lower gear.

06 12.21


Good driving practice

! If it is difficult to shift into reverse, putthe transmission in neutral, release theclutch pedal momentarily, and then tryagain.

! When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse fifth gear.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

NOTICE

! Do not use any gears other thanfirst gear when starting off andmoving forward. Doing so may dam-age the clutch.

! Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before shifting into reverse.

Parking brake

PS17504

Type A

PS17505

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Pull up the lever. For better hold-ing power, first depress the brake pedaland hold it while setting the parkingbrake.To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),press the thumb button (2), and lower (3).

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

06 12.21


06 12.21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAudio systemReference 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio system operating hints 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 8


Reference

PS18501

Type 1: AM·FM radio (with cassette andcompact disc changer controller)

PS18502

Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc player/MP3/WMA player (with compact discchanger controller)

This Section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR VOL” or “PWR·VOL” to turnthe audio system on and off.

Push “AM”, “FM1·2”, “FM1”, “FM2”,“DISC·AUX” or “AUX” to turn on thatfunction without pushing “PWR VOL” or“PWR·VOL”. To turn on the compact discplayer, a compact disc must be loaded inthe player.

You can turn on the player by inserting acompact disc.

You can turn off the player by ejecting thecompact disc. If the audio system waspreviously off, then the entire audio sys-tem will be turned off when you eject thecompact disc. If another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.

06 12.21

Using your audio system——Some basics


SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM1·2”, “FM1”, “FM2”,“DISC·AUX” or “AUX” if the system isalready on but you want to switch fromone function to another.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

SRS !

Type 2 audio system utilizes SRSFOCUS! and SRS TruBass! audioenhancement technologies, under licensefrom SRS Labs, inc., in all mode exceptAM radio mode.

FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbol aretrademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.FOCUS and TruBass technologies areincorporated under license from SRSLabs, Inc.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble and bass levels. In fact, differ-ent kinds of music and vocal programsusually sound better with different mixesof treble and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

To remove the antenna, carefully turn itcounterclockwise.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is retracted before driv-ing your Toyota through an automaticcar wash.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the cassette player do not in-sert anything other than cassettetapes into the slot.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. The player will playfrom track 1 through to the end of thedisc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

06 12.21


PS18503

AUX adapter (type 2 only)

The AUX adapter is installed on thecenter console. To use the AUX adapter,open the lid as shown in the illustra-tion.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUXadapter, you can listen to music from aportable audio device through the vehicle’sspeaker system.

06 12.21


Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

06 12.21

—Controls and features"Type 1

PS18504


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station (see “TUNE” knob or“SEEK” button). Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The button num-ber will appear on the display.

To tune in to a preset station: Push thebutton for the station you want. The but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” or “FM1·2”).

(Program)

Push “ ” to select the other side of acassette tape. The display indicates whichside is currently selected (“ ” indicates

top side, “ ” indicates bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward buttons)

Cassette Player

Push the fast forward button to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear onthe display. Push the reverse button torewind a tape. “REW” will appear on thedisplay.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the fast forward button or“TAPE”; to stop the tape while it is re-winding, push the reverse button or“TAPE”.

If a tape side rewinds completely, the cas-sette player will stop and then play thatsame side. If a tape fast forwards com-pletely, the cassette player will play theother side of the tape, using the auto−re-verse feature.

Compact Disc Player

If you want to fast forward or reversethrough a compact disc track, push andhold in the fast forward or reverse button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.

AM

Push “AM” to turn on the radio and selectthe AM band. “AM” will appear on thedisplay.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “AM”. Also, push“AM” to switch from cassette or compactdisc operation to radio operation.

CTRL / MODE (Audio control and modeadjustment)

Manual tone adjustment function—

This knob is used to adjust the tonemanually.

For low−pitch tone adjustment, push“CTRL / MODE” repeatedly until “BAS”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“BAS −5” to “BAS 5”.

For high−pitch tone adjustment, push“CTRL / MODE” repeatedly until “TRE”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“TRE −5” to “TRE 5”.

06 12.21


Sound balance adjustment function—

This knob is also used to adjust thesound balance between the front and rear,and the right and left speakers.

For front/rear adjustment, push “CTRL /MODE” repeatedly until “FAd” appears onthe display. Then turn the knob to adjustthe front/rear balance.

The display will show the range from“FAd−F7” to “FAd−R7”.

For left/right adjustment, push “CTRL /MODE” repeatedly until “BAL” appears onthe display. Then turn the knob to adjustthe left/right balance.

The display will show the range from“BAL−L7” to “BAL−R7”.

AUX (Auxiliary button)

This button is used to operate each playerwhen a cassette tape player, compact discplayer or compact disc changer isequipped with this radio player.

With cassette tape player

Push “AUX” to switch from radio to cas-sette operation. If the audio system is off,you can turn on the cassette player bypushing “AUX”. In both cases, a cassettemust already be loaded in the player.

With compact disc player or compactdisc changer

Push “AUX” to switch from radio to com-pact disc operation. If the audio system isoff, you can turn on the compact discplayer by pushing “AUX”. In both cases,a disc must already be loaded in theplayer.

When the audio is set into compact discoperation, the display shows the track or,track and disc number currently beingplayed. Each time you push “AUX”, thesystem changes to the changer.

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display following error messages.

If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indi-cates that the inside of the player unitmay be too hot due to the very high ambi-ent temperature. Remove the disc or mag-azine from the player and allow the playerto cool down.

If “Err 1” appears on the display, itindicates the disc is dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted up−side down. Clean thedisc or insert it correctly.

If “Err 2” appears on the display, itindicates no disc is loaded inside themagazine. Insert a disc.

If “Err 3” or “Err 4” appears on thedisplay, it indicates there is a trouble in-side the system. Eject the disc or maga-zine. Set the disc or magazine again.

If “OPEn” appears on the display, itindicates the compact disc changer lid isopen. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction is not rectified, takeyour vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DISC !"

Compact disc changer only—

By using this button, you can select adisc you wish to listen to.

Push either side of the button until thenumber of the disc you want to listen toappears on the display.

Dolby! B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby! B Noise Reduction,push the “ ” button. The “ B” willappear on the display. Push the buttonagain to turn off Dolby! B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used forrecording the tape.

06 12.21


∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM1·2

Push “FM1·2” to turn on the radio andselect the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2” willappear on the display. This system allowsyou to set twelve FM stations, two foreach button.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “FM1·2”. Also,push “FM1·2” to switch from cassette orcompact disc operation to radio operation.

PWR/VOL (Power/Volume)

Push “PWR/VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR/VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on all the com-pact discs in the magazine in random or-der, or only listen to the tracks on aspecific compact disc in random order.

Random playing for the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “RAND”. “RAND”will appear on the display. The disc youare listening to will play in random order.If you hear a beep, you held the buttontoo long, and the player will play all thetracks in the magazine in random order.To turn off the random feature, push“RAND” again.


Random playing for all the tracks in themagazine:Push and hold “RAND” until you hear abeep. “ ·RAND” will appear on the dis-

play and the player will perform all thetracks on all the discs in the magazine inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push “RAND” again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette Player

Push “RPT” while the track is playing.“RPT” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically berewound and replayed. This process willbe continued until you push the buttonagain to turn off the repeat feature.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact Disc Player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” while thetrack is playing. “RPT” will appear on thedisplay. If you hear a beep, you held thebutton too long, and the player will repeatthe whole disc. When the track ends, itwill automatically be replayed. This pro-cess will be continued until you push thebutton again to turn off the repeat feature.


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” until you hear abeep. “ ·RPT” will appear on the dis-

play. The player will repeat all the trackson the disc you are listening to. When thedisc ends, the player will automatically goback to the first track on the disc andreplay. This process will be continued untilyou push the button again to turn off therepeat feature.

06 12.21


SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear abeep. The radio will tune in the next pres-et station up the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To select a station, push“SCAN” again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “SCAN”. If youhear a beep, you held the button too long,and the radio will scan the preset sta-tions. The radio will find the next stationup the station band, stay there for 5 se-conds, and then scan again. To select astation, push “SCAN” again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc youare listening to. If you hear a beep, youheld the button too long, and the playerwill scan the first track of all the discs inthe magazine. To select a track, push“SCAN” again. If the player scanned allthe tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-ning.


Scanning the first track of all the discs inthe magazine:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ·SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will perform the first trackof the next disc. To select a disc, pushthe “SCAN” again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

SEEK (Seeking)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek a station, quickly push and re-lease the “"” or “!” under the “SEEK”.Do this again to find another station.

Cassette Player

By using this button, you can skip up ordown to a different track.

You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.

Push the up or down side of the button.“FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on thedisplay.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the display reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button ten times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

When counting the number of tracks youwant to rewind, remember to count thecurrent track as well. For example, if youwant to rewind to a song that is two be-fore the song you are listening to, pushon the down side of the button until “REW3” appears on the display.

If you have pushed the track button morethan you wanted to, push the other sideof the button. The track number will bereduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of tracksremaining on the current cassette side.

# After the beginning of the tape isreached, the player will automaticallystart playing the same side.

06 12.21


# After the end of the tape is reached,the player will automatically reversesides and start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track buttonto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spokenword, live, or classical recordings.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TRACK (Track up/down button): Compact disc player

By using this button, you can skip up ordown to a different track.

Push either side of the track button untilthe number of the track you want to listento appears on the display. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the currenttrack, push the down side of the buttonone time, quickly.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the knob clockwise to step up thefrequency. Turn the knob counterclockwiseto step down the frequency.

06 12.21


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

06 12.21

"Type 2

PS18505


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The button num-ber and station frequency will appear onthe display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button toeject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balanceadjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIO CONT”knob, the mode changes. To adjust thetone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

ASL: Automatically adjusts the volume andtone quality according to vehicle speed.The display ranges from “LOW“, “MID”and “HIGH”.

LIVE−ACS (LIVE Acoustic/Psychologicalacoustic technology)

The acoustic enhancement techonologiescalled FOCUS (Trademark) and TruBass(Trademark) are adopted under licensewith SRS corporation for all mode exceptfor AM radio mode. By utilizing thesetechnologies, low range can be enhancedwithout distorting the mid range. In addi-tion, it can bring the sound stage upwardso that the sound is audible from upperspace even if the speakers are positionedaround lower section.

FOCUS and TruBass technology is alwayscontained in the sound quality of this play-er. FOCUS and TruBass technology is in-corporated under license from SRS Labs,Inc.

06 12.21


DISC·AUX

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play acompact disc. Each time you push thisbutton, the system changes between thecompact disc player and the changer ofseparate unit if it is equipped.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

“NO MUSIC”: The disc with no mp3/wmadata has been inserted. Remove the discfrom the player and insert a mp3/wmadata disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

AUX

In order to listen to a portable music play-er, such as a compact disc or MD player,through the car stereo speakers, push the“DISC·AUX” button after it has been con-nected to the AUX adapter on the centerconsole.

! DISC "

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “!” (preset button 3) or “"” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:Push either side of the “FOLDER” severaltimes until the number of the folder youwant to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the currentfolder:Push and hold “!” side of the button untilyou hear a beep.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn onthe radio and select the FM band. “FM1”or “FM2” will appear on the display. Thissystem allows you to set twelve FM sta-tions, two for each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

06 12.21


RAND (Random)

Compact Disc Player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.


To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

MP3/WMA Player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to all the files on the compactdisc in random order, or only listen to thefiles in a folder in random order.

To randomly play the files on a folder:Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay.

To randomly play all the files on the com-pact disc:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willplay all the files on the disc in randomorder. To turn off the random feature, pushthis button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact Disc Player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) to repeat atrack. “ ” will appear on the display.When the track ends, it will automaticallybe replayed. This process will be contin-ued until you push the button again toturn off the repeat feature.

MP3/WMA Player

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the files in the folder you are listeningto. When the final file in the folder ends,the player will automatically go back tothe first file in the folder and replay. Toturn off the repeat feature, push this but-ton again.

06 12.21


SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer scanned all the tracks on the disc,it will stop scanning.


Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack of the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

MP3/WMA Player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the files in a folder or scan thefirst file of all the folders.

Scanning the files in a folder:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the files in the folder you arelistening to. To select a file, push “SCAN”again. If the player scanned all the filesin the folder, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ” will appear on the display and

the player will scan the first file of thenext folder. To select a folder, push the“SCAN” again. If the player has scannedall the folders, it will stop scanning.

06 12.21


SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “"” or “!” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “"” or “!” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA Player

To file up or down to a different file: Push either side of the “TRACK” severaltimes until the file you want to listen toappears on the display. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the current file,push the “!” side of the button one time,quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc: If you want to fast forward or reverse thedisc, push and hold it until you hear abeep. When you release the button, theplayer will resume playing.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TEXT

Compact Disc Player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” while the compact discis playing. The display changes in theorder from the elapsed time to disc titleto track title, then back to the elapsedtime.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold ituntil you hear a beep. The rest of the title(up to 24 letters) will appear.

06 12.21


MP3/WMA Player

This button is used to change the displayfor the MP3/WMA file that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” while the MP3/WMAfile is playing. The display changes in theorder from the elapsed time to foldername to file name to album title (MP3 fileonly) to track title to artist name, thenback to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a MP3/WMAfile that does not contain text data is play-ing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the dis-play.

If the entire text data is not displayed,push and hold it until you hear a beep.The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the knob clockwise to step up thefrequency. Turn the knob counterclockwiseto step down the frequency.

MP3/WMA Player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turnthe knob counterclockwise to file down.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-erations:

! Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

! Do not put anything other than aCompact Disc into the slot.

! The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio system which you are listeningto. However, this does not indicatea malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range, and the farther youare from a station, the weaker its signalwill be. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

06 12.21

Audio system operating hints


AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPES

For high performance from your cassetteplayer and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly.

# A dirty tape head or tape path candecrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high−quality cassettes.

# Low−quality cassette tapes can causemany problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto−reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

# Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

# Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

# Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

# Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.

06 12.21


CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

# Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

# Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

# If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.

XS18016

# Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

Copy−protected CDCD−ROM

Z17038

Special shaped discs

Z17058

Transparent/translucent discs

06 12.21


Z17039

Low quality discs

Z17037

Labeled discs

NOTICE

! Do not use special shaped, trans-parent/translucent, low quality or la-beled discs such as those shown inthe illustrations. The use of suchdiscs may damage the player orchanger, or it may be impossible toeject the discs.

! This system is not designed for useof Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Discbecause it may cause damage tothe player or changer.

Z17052

Correct Wrong

# Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

# Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

# Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

06 12.21


Z17053

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti−static device.

MP3/WMA FILES

# MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3and refers to an audio compressiontechnology standard.

# WMA is short for Windows MediaTM

Audio. WMA is able to compress audiodata to about 1/2 the level of MP3.

# The MP3/WMA player allows playbackof MP3/WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−Rand CD−RW discs.

Disc recordings compatible with level 1and level 2 of ISO 9660 and with theRomeo and Joliet file system can beplayed back.

# When naming a MP3/WMA file, add thecorresponding filename extension(.mp3/.wma).

# The MP3/WMA player plays back fileswith the file name extension(.mp3/.wma) as an MP3/WMA file. Toprevent noise and malfunctions, do notuse this extension for files other thanMP3/WMA files.

# It is possible to play back multi−ses-sion compatible recorded discs.

# When playing discs with MP3/WMAfiles and audio data (CD−DA) such asCD−EXTRA and MIXED−MODE CD,CD−DA only can be played.

# Files are compatible with the ID3 TagVer. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3formats for display of album (disc title),track (track title) and artist (track art-ist).

# Files are compatible with the WMA Tagfor display of album (disc title), track(track title) and artist (track artist).

# Only when MP3/WMA files of 32, 44.1and 48 kHz frequencies are playedback, the emphasis function is valid.(MP3 files: 16, 22.05, 24 kHz samplingfrequencies can be played back.)

06 12.21


# The sound quality of MP3/WMA filesgenerally becomes better with higherbit rates. This product can play record-ings with bit rates as follows:

MP3 files: 64 kbps to 320 kbpsWMA files: 48 kbps to 320 kbpsBut in order to be able to enjoy acertain sound quality, it is recom-mended to use only discs recordedwith a bit rate of at least 128 kbps.

# The MP3/WMA player does not playback MP3/WMA files from discs record-er using packet write data transfer(UDF format). Discs should be re-corded using “pre−mastering” softwarerather than packet−write software.

# There is no m3u playlist compatibility.

# There is no compatibility with the MP3i(MP3 interactive) or mp3PRO format.

# The MP3/WMA player is compatiblewith VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

# When playing back files recorded asVBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the playtime will not be correctly displayed iffast−forward or reverse operations areused.

# It is not possible to check folders thatdo not include MP3/WMA files.

# MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folderscan be played back. However, there isa delay in the start of playback ondiscs with numerous tiers. For this rea-son we recommend creating discs withno more than 2 tiers.

# It is possible to play back up to 255files on one disc.

# It is possible to play back up to 192folders on one disc.

18i023

001

002 003 004 005

006

007

008

009

010

011

Folder 1

Folder 3

Folder

Folder 4

Folder 6

Folder 7

Folder 8

Folder 2

Folder 5

: MP3/WMA file

06 12.21


# The turn of play of the compact dischaving the structure shown on the leftis as follows:

001 002 . . . 011

# The order changes depending on thePC and MP3/WMA encoding softwareyou use.

CD−R and CD−RW discs

# CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (aprocess that allows them to be playedback on a conventional CD player)cannot be played back.

# It may not be possible to play backCD−R/CD−RW discs recorded on a mu-sic CD recorder or a personal comput-er because of disc characteristics,scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,condensation, etc. on the lens of thisunit.

# Playback of discs recorded on a per-sonal computer may not be possibledepending on the application settingsand the environment. Record with thecorrect format. (For details, contact themanufacturer of the applications.)

# Playback of CD−R/CD−RW discs maybecome impossible in case of directexposure to sunlight, high tempera-tures, or the storage conditions in thevehicle.

# Titles and other text information re-corded on a CD−R/CD−RW disc maynot be displayed by the MP3/WMAplayer (in the case of audio data (CD−DA)).

# The MP3/WMA player conforms to thetrack skip function of the CD−R/CD−RW disc.

# If you insert a CD−RW disc into theMP3/WMA player, load time to play-back will be longer than for a conven-tional CD or CD−R disc.

# Read the precautions accompanyingthe CD−R/CD−RW discs before use.

# Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannotbe played back using the DDCD(Double Density CD) system.

06 12.21


TERMS

Packet write—

This is a general term for a method ofwriting on CD−R, etc. at the time requiredfor a file, just as is done with files onfloppy or hard discs.

Bit rate—

This expresses data volume per second,or bps units (bits per second). The higherthe rate, the more information is availableto reproduce the sound. Using the sameencoding methods (such as MP3/WMA),the higher the rate, the better the sound.

Multi−session—

Multi−session is a recording method thatallows additional data to be recorded later.When recording data on a CD−ROM,CD−R or CD−RW, etc., all data from be-ginning to end is treated as a single unitor session. Multi−session is a method ofrecording more than 2 sessions in onedisc.

CD−DA—

CD−DA is an abbreviation of CompactDisc Digital Audio. It refers to the uncom-pressed format of regular CDs.

ID3/WMA Tag—

This is a method of embedding track−re-lated information in a MP3/WMA file. Thisembedded information can include thetrack title, the artist’s name, the albumtitle, the music genre, the year of produc-tion, comments and other data. The con-tents can be freely edited using softwarewith ID3/WMA tag editing functions. Al-though the tags are restricted to the num-ber of characters, the information can beviewed when the track is played back.

ISO 9660 format—

This is the international standard for theformat logic of CD−ROM folders and files.For the ISO 9660 format, there are regula-tions for the following two levels.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (the nameconsists of up to 8 characters, half−byteEnglish capital letters and half−byte nu-merals and the “−” sign, with a file exten-sion of three characters.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 (MP3files)/15 (WMA files) characters (includingthe separation mark “.” and a file exten-sion). Each folder contains less than 8hierarchies.

Extended formats

Joliet:

File name can have up to 64 characters.

Romeo:

File names can have up to 128 charac-ters.

m3u—

Playlists created using the “WINAMP” soft-ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—

MP3 is short for MPEG 1 & 2 Audio Layer3. It is an audio compression standard setby a working group (MPEG) of the ISO(International Standards Organization).MP3 is able to compress audio data toabout 1/10 the level of a conventionaldisc.

06 12.21


WMA—

WMA is short for Windows MediaTM Audio.It is the audio file format developed byMicrosoft Corporation. WMA is able tocompress audio data to about 1/2 the lev-el of MP3.

Windows MediaTM and Windows$ are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion in the United States and other coun-tries.

06 12.21


06 12.21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemControls 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel vents 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning filter 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 9


Controls1. Air intake selector

2. Air flow selector

3. Temperature selector

4. Fan speed selector

5. “A/C” Button (on some models)

06 12.21

PS19516


Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used forair flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Use with the air intake selector posi-tioned in FRESH.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to thewindshield position turns on the defog-ging function with the purpose of clear-ing the front view.

Use with the air intake selector posi-tioned in FRESH.

Vehicles with “A/C” button—

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.

06 12.21


PS19502

Air intake selector

Turn the knob to select the air source.

1. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

2. Recirculate—Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

“A/C” button (on some models)

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

06 12.21


Air flow selector settings

: on some models

Operating tips! To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

! Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

! On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

! Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

! On cold days, set the fan speed to“high” for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

06 12.21

PS19503


! When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “0”.

! If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “0”Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

! For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

! Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

! Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

PS19504a

Air conditioning


Fan speed—Any setting except “0”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

! For quick cooling, turn the temperatureselector knob fully towards COLD andchange the air intake selector modeRECIRCULATE.

06 12.21


Ventilation


Fan speed—Any setting except “0”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

The inside of the windshield



(red zone) to heat; COLD (blue zone) to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to windshieldposition turns on the defogging functionwith the purpose of clearing the frontview.



! On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

The outside of the windshield



(red zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to windshieldposition turns on the defogging functionwith the purpose of clearing the frontview.



! To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

Instrument panel vents

PS19505

Open

Close

Side vents

PS19506Open

Close

Center vents

06 12.21


If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The instrumentpanel vents may be opened or closed asshown.

PS19507

Side vents

PS19508

Center vents

You can change air flow direction by turn-ing the instrument panel vents.

06 12.21


PS19509

The air conditioning filter informationlabel is placed inside of the glove boxas shown and indicates that a filter hasbeen installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dustfrom entering the vehicle through the airconditioning vent.

PS19510

The air conditioning filter is behind theglove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioning and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows begin to fog up easily inFRESH mode.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,inspect and replace the air conditioningfilter according to the maintenanceschedule. In dusty areas or areas withheavy traffic flow, such as inner city ordesert areas, early replacement may berequired. (For scheduled maintenanceinformation, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement.”)

06 12.21

Air conditioning filter (on some models)—

—Checking and replacing theair conditioning filter


PS19511

1. Push in each side of the glove boxto disconnect the claws.

PS19512

2. Pinch the knobs located on eachside and remove the filter cover.

PS19513

3. Pull out the filter and rotate it asshown in the illustration to remove.Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

06 12.21


PS19514

When inserting the filter in the filteroutlet, keep the arrow pointing up andinsert the filter as shown in the illustra-tion above.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.

06 12.21


06 12.21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentClock 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove boxes 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holders 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage storage box 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 1− 10


Clock

PS10501

With tachometer

PS10502

Without tachometer

The digital clock indicates the time.

To adjust the clock, put the key in the“ON” position.

With tachometer—

Pushing the reset knob flashes the indica-tor for the hour and you can adjust thehour.

Press the reset knob until the desiredhour will appear.

After 5 or more seconds pass without op-erating, the indicator for the minuteflashes. Then you can adjust the minute.

Press the reset knob until the desiredminute will appear.

After 5 or more seconds passes withoutoperating, the indicator will return to thenormal display.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

Without tachometer—

Pushing the reset knob flashes the indica-tor for the minute and you can adjust theminute.

Press the reset knob until the desiredminute will appear.

After 5 or more seconds pass without op-erating, the indicator for the hour flashes.Then you can adjust the hour.

Press the reset knob until the desiredhour will appear.

After 5 or more seconds passes withoutoperating, the indicator will return to thenormal display.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock)

06 12.21


Power outlet

PS10503

The power outlet is designed for powersupply for car accessories. To use thepower outlet, open as shown in the il-lustration.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the power outlet to be used.

NOTICE

! To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of12V/120W.

! To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

! Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinganything other than an appropriateplug that fits the outlet, or allowingany liquid to get into the outlet maycause electrical failure or short cir-cuits.

Glove boxes

PS10504

Upper glove box

PS10505

Lower glove box

06 12.21


To open the glove boxes, pull the lever.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

NOTICE

Upper glove box: During hot weather,the interior of the vehicle becomesvery hot. Do not leave anything flam-mable or deformable such as a light-er, glasses, etc. inside.

Auxiliary boxesTo use the auxiliary boxes, open thelids as shown in the following illustra-tions.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary box closedwhile driving.

NOTICE

Type A: During hot weather, the inte-rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.Do not leave anything flammable ordeformable such as a lighter, glasses,etc. inside.

PS10506

Type A

PS10507

Type B

06 12.21


Cup holders

PS10508

Front

PS10509

Rear

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink−cans securely.

Front cup holders—To use the cup holder,pull it out.

Keep the cup holder closed when it is notin use.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other thancups or drink−cans in the cup holder,as such items may be thrown aboutand possibly injure people in the ve-hicle during sudden braking or in anaccident.

06 12.21


Bottle holders

PS10510

Front doors

PS10511

Rear doors (5−door models only)

PS10512

Rear side (3−door models only)

The bottle holders are designed to holdbottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder forany other purpose for which it wasintended. Inappropriately sized orshaped objects may be thrown aboutin the compartment and possibly in-jured people in the vehicle during asudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle inthe bottle holder because the con-tents may spill when the door opensor closes.

06 12.21


Luggage storage box

PS10513

To open the luggage storage box, turnthe knobs to the “UNLOCK” positionand open the lid. To close the luggagestorage box, lower the lid and turn theknobs to the “LOCK” position.

The luggage storage box is detachable.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the luggage storageboxes closed and locked while driv-ing.

PS10514

To remove the luggage storage box,turn the knobs to the “UNLOCK” posi-tion and remove it.

Luggage cover

PS10515

PS10516

06 12.21


When you open the back door, the lug-gage cover tilts up for easy access tothe luggage area.

For additional luggage space, unhook thecords, remove the luggage cover from theseatback and lift the cover out of theretainers.

Floor mat

PS10517

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat havetwo holes, then they are designed for usewith two locking clips. Attach the floor matto the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lockthe clips into the holes in the vehiclecarpet.

PS10518

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the vehicle carpet. If thefloor mat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

06 12.21


INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaBreak−in period 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three−way catalytic converter 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium−tipped spark plugs 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric power steering system 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 2


Break−in periodDrive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

! Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

! Avoid racing the engine.

! Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

! Do not drive slowly with the manualtransmission in a high gear.

! Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

! Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FuelFUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc-tane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

GASOLINES CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contain detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

06 12.21


QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 4 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-cropentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedrivability problems caused by the particu-lar gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable drivability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

! Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

! If driveability problems occur (poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

! Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

42 L (11.1 gal., 9.2 lmp. gal.)

06 12.21


The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that fuel has leaked onto theground, the fuel system has beendamaged and is in need of repair. Inthis case, do not restart the engine.

Operation in foreign countriesIf you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Three−way catalytic converter

PS21501

The three−way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

! Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

! Do not drive, idle or park your ve-hicle over anything that might burneasily such as grass, leaves, paperor rags.

06 12.21

Fuel pump shut off system


NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

! Use only unleaded gasoline.

! Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

! Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

! Avoid racing the engine.

! Do not push−start or pull−start yourvehicle.

! Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

! Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel system could cause an ex-tremely high three−way catalyticconverter temperature.

! If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

! To ensure that the three−waycatalytic converter and the entireemission control system operateproperly, your vehicle must receivethe periodic inspections required bythe Toyota Maintenance Schedule.For scheduled maintenanceinformation, refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

Engine exhaust cautions

CAUTION

! Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

! Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

! Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

! Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

06 12.21


! Keep the back door closed whiledriving. An open or unsealed backdoor may cause exhaust gases tobe drawn into the vehicle.

! To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

! If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, open the windows andclose the back door to ensureplenty of fresh air enters the ve-hicle. If you can smell exhaustfumes even though there are noother vehicles in the surroundingarea, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer. Continued in-halation of exhaust fumes can leadto death by gas poisoning.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

! Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

! Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qts./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qts./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

06 12.21

Facts about engine oilconsumption


As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an express way, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 270 in Section 7−2.

BS21008

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-mance or smooth driveability.

06 12.21

Iridium−tipped spark plugs


Brake systemThe tandem master cylinder brake systemis a hydraulic system with two separatesub−systems. If either sub−system shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum topower−assist the brakes. If the engineshould quit while you are driving, you canbring the vehicle to a stop with normalpedal pressure. There is enough reservedvacuum for one or two stops—but nomore!

CAUTION

! Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your reserved vacu-um.

! Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with“ABS” warning light)

The anti−lock brake system is designedto help prevent lock−up of the wheelsduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces. This assists inproviding directional stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti−lock brake system func-tion is in action, you may feel the brakepedal pulsating and hear a noise. In thissituation, to let the anti−lock brake sys-tem work for you, just hold the brakepedal down more firmly. Do not pumpthe brake in a panic stop. This will re-sult in reduced braking performance.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the anti−lock brake system is in theself−check mode, and does not indicate amalfunction.

06 12.21


When the anti−lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

! You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

! At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lockbrake system: Although the anti−lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

! Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

! Driving with tire chains installed.

! Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

! Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tire of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti−lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

06 12.21


SU21010

Type A

SH21003

Type B

“ABS” warning light

This light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if the system malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

! The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

! The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

06 12.21


The electric power steering system, us-ing an electric motor, assists the turn-ing of the steering wheel.

In the following cases, you may feel thesteering becomes heavy. But it is nota malfunction.

! When maneuvering or turning frequentlyover a long time

The power steering effect will be re-duced to prevent the system from over-heating. Avoid turning the steeringwheel, or stop the vehicle and turn theignition key to “ACC” or “LOCK”. Thesystem will become cool in about 10minutes.

NOTICE

Frequent maneuvering and turningover a long time may cause damageto the system in which the mecha-nism prevents overheating of the elec-tric power steering system.

! When the battery is discharged

Check the battery’s condition. Ifnecessary, recharge or replace thebattery. For details, see “Checkingbattery condition” on page 284 inSection 7−3.

In the following case, you may feel thesteering becoming heavy. Then, after 5minutes or more, the electric powersteering system warning light comeson. But it is not a malfunction.

! When racing the engine for 30 secondsor more with the vehicle stopped

The normal power steering effect willbe obtained and the warning light willgo off when you start driving.

INFORMATION

When the steering wheel is turned, amotor operating sound (whiningsound) may be heard. This occurswhen the power steering motor worksand is not defective.

SZ21004

Electric power steering system warninglight

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the elec-tric power steering system warning lightworks properly, the light turns off after afew seconds. If the system has malfunc-tions, the light comes on again.

If the following conditions occur, thisindicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warninglight system. Contact your Toyota deal-er as soon as possible to service thevehicle.

! The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on.

06 12.21

Electric power steering system


! The light stays on while you are driv-ing.

The warning light turning on while racingthe engine for a long time may not indi-cate malfunction. To turn off the light, re-start the engine and start driving.

CAUTION

If the electric power steering systemwarning light comes on, take your ve-hicle to Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. In this case, more effort isrequired for the steering wheel toturn than usual. Grip the steeringwheel firmly when driving.

Brake pad wear limit indicators

PS21502

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

PS21503

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

06 12.21

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber


PS21504

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

—Engine number

QS21002

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 47mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

06 12.21

Theft prevention labels (exceptfor Canada)


Suspension and chassis

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous vehicle handlingcharacteristics, resulting in loss ofcontrol.

06 12.21


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size—For details, see “Tire

size” on page 195.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see“DOT and Tire Identification Num-ber (TIN)” on page 194.

3. Location of tread wear indica-tors—For details, see “Checkingand replacing tires” on page 276.

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

5. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

06 12.21

Tire information——Tire symbols (Standard tire)

PS21505


6. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”—A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

7. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 276.

8. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For recommended cold tireinflation pressure, see “Tires” onpage 299.

9. Summer tire or all seasontire—An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. The tire notmarked with “M+S” is a summertire. For details, see “Types oftires” on page 204.

10.Uniform tire quality grading—For details, see “Uniform tire quali-ty grading” that follows.

06 12.21


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”—A

compact spare tire is identified bythe phrase “TEMPORARY USEONLY” molded into its sidewall.This tire is designed for temporaryemergency use only. For details,see “Compact spare tire” on page229.

2. Tire size—For details, see “Tiresize” on page 195.

3. DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)—For details, see“DOT and Tire Identification Num-ber (TIN)” on page 194.

4. Location of tread wear indica-tors—For details, see “Checkingand replacing tires” on page 276.

5. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 276.

06 12.21

—Tire symbols (Compactspare tire)

PS21506


6. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For recommended cold tireinflation pressure, see “Tires” onpage 299.

7. Tire ply composition and mate-rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”—A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

9. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

SU21021b

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

06 12.21

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)


PS21507

This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inches)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

SU21026a

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines10.Bead wires11. Chafer

06 12.21

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire


—Uniform tire quality gradingThis information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A.

Tread wear—The tread wear gradeis a comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1−1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

06 12.21


Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

06 12.21


—Glossary of tire terminologyTire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hoursor more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under thatcondition

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it isshown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, pow-er seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available asfactory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximumcapacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and addi-tional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—(a) curb weight;(b) accessory weight;(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) production options weight

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second columnof Table 1 that follows

06 12.21


Tire related term Meaning

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not pre-viously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy dutybrakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeperthan the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

06 12.21


Tire related term Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1–Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,Number of occupants

Vehicle normal load,Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

06 12.21


Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towingcapacity and cargo capacity. Followthe load limits shown below. Totalload capacity and seating capacityare also described on the tire andloading information label. For locationof the tire and loading informationlabel, see “Checking tire inflationpressure” on page 274.Total load capacity:

383 kg (845 lb.)Total load capacity means combinedweight of occupants, cargo and lug-gage. Tongue load is included whentrailer towing.

Seating capacity: Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximumnumber of occupants whose esti-mated average weight is 68 kg (150lb.) per person. Depending on theweight of each person, the seating ca-pacity given may exceed the totalload capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants arewithin the seating capacity, do not ex-ceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity (except forCanada): Toyota does not recommend towinga trailer with your vehicle. Yourvehicle is not designed for trailertowing.Towing capacity (for Canada):

318 kg (700 lb.)Towing capacity means the maximumgross trailer weight (trailer weight plusits cargo weight) that your vehicle isable to tow.Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “Capacity and distribution”that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

06 12.21

Vehicle load limits


When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following:! Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at allpossible. Be sure all items are se-cured in place.

! Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainthe balance.

! For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

! To prevent cargo and luggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the luggage compartmenthigher than the seatbacks.Keep cargo and luggage low,as close to the floor as pos-sible.

! Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. It isnot designed for passengers.They should ride in their seatswith their seat belts properlyfastened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely to suffer seri-ous bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a colli-sion.

! Do not place anything on theluggage cover. Such items maybe thrown about and possiblyinjure people in the vehicleduring sudden braking or anaccident. Secure all items in asafe place.

! Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyondthe vehicle capacity weight giv-en in Section 8.

06 12.21

Cargo and luggage——Stowage precautions


Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.

(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your ve-hicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs. (1400–750(5x150)=650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

Except for Canada—Toyota does notrecommend towing a trailer with yourvehicle. Your vehicle is not designedfor trailer towing.For Canada—For details about trailertowing, see page 214.

SU21020

Total loadcapacity

Cargocapacity

Example on Your VehicleIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle with the totalload capacity of 383 kg (845 lb.), theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity will be as follows:383 kg – 166 kg = 217 kg.(845 lb. – 366 lb. = 479 lb.)From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:

06 12.21

—Capacity and distribution


217 kg – 176 kg = 41 kg.(479 lb. – 388 lb. = 91 lb.)As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 201.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Types of tiresDetermine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are high−speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow−covered or icy roads.For driving on snow−covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

06 12.21


All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 191.

CAUTION

! Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

! Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and do not mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originally equippedtires and wheels as this cancause dangerous handlingcharacteristics, resulting inloss of control.

06 12.21


06 12.21


STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the engine 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving in the rain 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 219. . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 3


Before starting the engine1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,head restraint height and steeringwheel angle.

3. Adjust inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to “START”position and release it, the cranking holdfunction continues to crank the engine in“ON” position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engineafter about 20 seconds maximum if theengine has not started yet. When youcrank the engine again, wait a few sec-onds and restart it.

If you hold the key in “START” position,the function will keep cranking.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Manual transmission: Press the clutchpedal to the floor and shift the trans-mission into neutral. Hold the clutchpedal to the floor until the engine isstarted. A starter safety device will pre-vent the starter from operating if theclutch pedal is not fully depressed.

Automatic transmission: Put the se-lector lever in “P”. If you need to re-start the engine while the vehicle ismoving, put the selector lever in “N”.A starter safety device will prevent thestarter from operating if the selectorlever is in any drive position.

4. Automatic transmission only: De-press the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

06 12.21

How to start the engine——Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking


(b) Starting the engineBefore starting the engine, be sure tofollow the instructions in “(a) Beforecranking”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair−fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,crank the engine by turning the key to“START”. Release it when the enginestarts.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,not in idle. For warming up, drive withsmoothly turning engine until engine cool-ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page222 in Section 4.

NOTICE

! Do not race a cold engine.

! If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

! Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

! Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

! When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P” (automatic) or in first orreverse (manual). If necessary, blockthe wheels.

06 12.21

Tips for driving in variousconditions


! Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

! Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

! Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

! Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

! To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

! Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking could causethe vehicle to skid or spin.

! Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

! Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

Driving in the rainDriving on a slippery road surface

Drive carefully when it is raining, becausevisibility will be reduced, the windows maybecome fogged−up, and the road will beslippery.

! Drive carefully when it starts to rain,because the road surface will be espe-cially slippery.

! Refrain from high speeds when drivingon an expressway in the rain, becausethere may be a layer of water betweenthe tires and the road surface, prevent-ing the steering and brakes from oper-ating properly.

06 12.21


CAUTION

! Sudden braking, acceleration andsteering when driving on a slipperyroad surface may cause tire slip-page and reduce your ability tocontrol the vehicle, resulting in anaccident.

! Sudden changes in engine speed,such as sudden engine braking,may cause the vehicle to skid, re-sulting in an accident.

! After driving through a puddle,lightly depress the brake pedal tomake sure that the brakes are func-tioning properly. Wet brake padsmay prevent the brakes from func-tioning properly. If the brakes ononly one side are wet and not func-tioning properly, steering controlmay be affected, resulting in an ac-cident.

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has floodedafter heavy rain etc. Doing so may causeserious damage to the vehicle.

NOTICE

Driving on a flooded road may causethe engine to stall as well as causeserious vehicle malfunctions such asshorts in electrical components andengine damage from water immersion.In the event that you drive on aflooded road and the vehicle isflooded, be sure to have your Toyotadealer check brake function, changesin quantity and quality of engine oil,transaxle fluid, etc. and lubricant con-dition for the bearings and suspen-sion joints (where possible) and thefunction of all joints and bearings.

Winter driving tipsMake sure you have a proper freezeprotection for engine coolant.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−life hy-brid organic acid technology. (Coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology isa combination of low phosphates and or-ganic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level”on page 272 in Section 7−2 for details ofcoolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35"C(−31"F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42"C(−44"F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

06 12.21


Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. Section 7−3 tells you how to visuallyinspect the battery. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See Section 7−2 for recommended viscos-ity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in yourvehicle during winter months may causeharder starting. If you are not sure aboutwhich oil to use, call your Toyota deal-er—they will be pleased to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” (automatic) or into first or reverse(manual) and block the rear wheels. Donot use the parking brake, or snow orwater accumulated in and around theparking brake mechanism may freeze,making it hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

PS31501

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

06 12.21

Dinghy towing(with automatic transmission)


PS31502

Your vehicle can be dinghy towed (withfour wheels on the ground) from thefront behind a motorhome.

CAUTION

Dinghy towing requires special equip-ment and accessories. Please refer toyour service outlet of the motorhomemanufacture for the recommendedequipment.

NOTICE

Dinghy towing does not eliminate thepossibility of damage to your vehicle.

DINGHY TOWING TIPS

Before dinghy towing, be sure to ob-serve the following in order to reducethe damage to your vehicle.

1. Put the shift lever in neutral.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”position. Make sure the audio is turnedoff and any item is not plugged intothe power outlet.

NOTICE

To avoid the locking of the steeringwheel, turn the ignition switch to the“ACC” position.

3. Release the parking brake.

After dinghy towing, let the engine idle formore than 3 minutes before driving thevehicle.

PS31503

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle from therear. This may cause serious damageto your vehicle.

06 12.21

Dinghy towing(with manual transmission)


QS31501

Toyota does not recommend towing atrailer with your Toyota. Toyota alsodoes not recommend the installation ofa tow hitch or the use of a tow hitchcarrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bi-cycle, etc. Your Toyota is not designedfor trailer towing or for the use of towhitch mounted carriers.

Trailer towing (for Canada)Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger−carrying vehicle. Towing atrailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For yoursafety and the safety of others, you mustnot overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyotawarranties do not apply to damage ormalfunction caused by towing a trailer forcommercial purposes. Ask your localToyota dealer for further details beforetowing.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trailerweight, gross vehicle weight, gross axleweight and trailer tongue load are all with-in the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

! The total trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo load) mustnot exceed 318 kg (700 lb.). Exceed-ing this weight is dangerous.

! Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

06 12.21

Trailer towing (except forCanada)


PS21504

! The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

! The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

SY31001a

Total trailer weight Tongue load

X 100 = 9 to 11%Tongue load

Total trailer weight

! The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumof 32 kg (70 lb.). Never load thetrailer with more weight in the backthan in the front. About 60% of thetrailer load should be in the fronthalf of the trailer and the remaining40% in the rear.

HITCHES

! Use only a hitch (Toyota genuine hitchor equivalent) which is recommendedby the hitch manufacturer and conformsto the total trailer weight requirement.

! Follow the directions supplied by thehitch manufacturer. Lubricate the hitchball with a light coat of grease.

! Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.

NOTICE

Do not use axle−mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires. Also, never install a hitch whichmay interfere with the normal functionof an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if soequipped.

06 12.21


BRAKE AND SAFETY CHAINS

! Toyota recommends trailers withbrakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

! A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tion.

CAUTION

! Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.

! Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES

! Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 274 in Sec-tion 7−2 and page 299 in Section 8 forinstructions.

! The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

! Trailer lights must comply with federal,state/provincial and local regulations.See your local recreational vehicledealer or rental agency for the correcttype of wiring and relays for your trail-er. Check for correct operation of theturn signals and stop lights each timeyou hitch up. Direct splicing may dam-age your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

! Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

! If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For thisinformation, please refer to thescheduled maintenance information inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

! Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

! Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose−up or nose−downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

! Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it can not shift.

! Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

06 12.21


TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

! Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

! Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer.) Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

! Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

! Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, prevent excessive clutchslippage by keeping engine rpm lowand not racing the engine. Always startout in first gear.

! Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

! Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

! Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

! Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

! In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency, do not use fifth gear (manual)or do not put the transmission in “D”(automatic).

06 12.21


! Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30°C [85°F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 227 inSection 4

! Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P” (automatic)or in first or reverse (manual). Avoidparking on a slope with a trailer, butif it cannot be avoided, do so onlyafter performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into first or reverse (manual) or“P” (automatic) and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position(automatic) or the clutch pedal de-pressed (manual), start the engine.(With an automatic transmission, besure to keep the brake pedal de-pressed.)

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake (also footbrake on automatic transmission ve-hicles) and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

! Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

! Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

! Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

06 12.21


Improving fuel economy is easy–just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

! Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See Section7−2 for instructions.

! Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

! Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

! Put the selector lever into the “D”when engine braking is not required.

Driving with the selector lever in “3”will reduce the fuel economy (For de-tails, see “Automatic transmission” onpage 125 in Section 1−7.)

! Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

! Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

! Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

! Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop−and−go drivingwastes fuel.

! Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

! Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

! Do not rest your foot on the clutchor brake pedal. This causes needlesswear, overheating and poor fuel econo-my.

! Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive,the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

! Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

! Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

! Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner,improper valve clearance, dirty plugs,dirty oil and grease,brakes notadjusted, etc. all lower engineperformance and contribute to poor fueleconomy. For longer life of all partsand lower operating costs, keep allmaintenance work on schedule, and ifyou often drive under severeconditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenanceinformation, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

06 12.21

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer


CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.

06 12.21


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 244. . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 4


Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct starting pro-cedure given in “How to start the engine”in Section 3 and that you have sufficientfuel. If your vehicle is equipped with theengine immobilizer system, also checkwhether the other keys will start the en-gine. If they work, your key may be bro-ken. Have the key checked at your Toyotadealer. If none of your keys work, theremay be a malfunction in the immobilizersystem. Call your Toyota dealer. (See“Keys (with engine immobilizer system)”on page 11 in Section 1−2.)

If the engine does not turn over orturns over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are connectedcorrectly, switch on the interior light.

3. If the light does not come on, is dimor goes out when the starter iscranked, the battery is discharged. Youmay try jump starting. See “(c) Jumpstarting” for further instructions.

If the light comes on and is normal, butthe engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not pull− or push−start the ve-hicle. It may damage the vehicle orcause a collision when the enginestarts. Also the three−way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK” and try starting the engineagain.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” for further instructions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

(b) Starting a flooded engineIf the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to“START” with the accelerator pedal fullydepressed, and hold the key at this posi-tion for about 30 seconds. Then thecranking hold function stops cranking au-tomatically, and you can try starting theengine with your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a fewminutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

06 12.21

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks


(c) Jump startingTo avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

! Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

! If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water imme-diately. Then get immediate medicalattention. If possible, continue toapply water with a sponge or clothwhile en route to the medical office.

! The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

PS41009a

BEFORE JUMP STARTING

Remove the cover as shown in the il-lustration.

06 12.21


JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.

If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

LS40034

Jumpercable

Positiveterminal(“+” mark) Positive terminal

(“+” mark)

Discharged battery

Boosterbattery

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

LS40035

Discharged battery

Negative terminal(“−” mark)

Jumper cable

Boosterbattery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:

06 12.21


PS41501

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

5. Charge the discharged battery with thejumper cables connected for approxi-mately 5 minutes. At this time, run theengine in the vehicle with the boosterbattery at about 2000 rpm with the ac-celerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

7. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

9. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked at your Toyotadealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart your en-gine in the normal way.

If another attempt is not successful, thebattery may be depleted. Have it checkedat your Toyota dealer.

06 12.21


PS41010a

AFTER JUMP STARTING

Install the cover as shown in the illustra-tion.

NOTICE

After installed the cover, make surethe cover is securely in its originalposition. If it is not secured, it maybe damaged to your vehicle.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the engineagain.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” in this Section.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

06 12.21

If your engine stalls whiledriving

If you cannot increase enginespeed


If your vehicle overheatsIf your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”(automatic) or neutral (manual) and ap-ply the parking brake. Turn off the airconditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning and make sure the electriccooling fan is operating. If it is not,turn the ignition off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealerfor assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the en-gine is running. Fill it about half full.For the coolant type see “Coolant typeselection” on page 272 in Section 7−2.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

06 12.21


If you have a flat tire—1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P” (auto-matic) or reverse (manual).

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of personal injury:! Follow jacking instructions.! Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

! Do not start or run the enginewhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

! Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin “P” (automatic) or reverse(manual). Block the wheel diag-onally opposite to the one be-ing changed if necessary.

! Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

! Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

! Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

! Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

! When raising the vehicle, donot put an object on or underthe jack.

! Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

06 12.21


NOTICE

Do not continue driving with adeflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair. SZ41023

Compact spare tireThe compact spare tire is designedfor temporary emergency use only.The compact spare tire is identifiedby the distinctive wording “TEM-PORARY USE ONLY” molded into thesidewall of the tire.The compact spare tire saves spacein your luggage compartment, and itslighter weight helps to improve fueleconomy and permits easier installa-tion in case of a flat tire.

The compact spare tire can be usedmany times, if necessary. It has treadlife of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) de-pending on road conditions and yourdriving habits. When tread wear indi-cators appear on the tire, replace thetire.See also the tire information in Sec-tion 7−2 for details on the tread wearindicators and other service informa-tion.

06 12.21


CAUTION

! The compact spare tire was de-signed especially for your To-yota. Do not use it on any othervehicle.

! Do not use more than one com-pact spare tire at the sametime.

! The pressure for the compactspare tire must be 420 kpa (4.2kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi).

! Do not exceed 80 km/h (50mph) when driving with thecompact spare tire.

! Replace the compact spare tirewith the standard tire as soonas possible.

! Avoid sudden acceleration,sudden deceleration and sharpturns with the compact sparetire.

NOTICE

Your ground clearance is re-duced when the compact sparetire is installed so avoid drivingover obstacles and drive slowlyon rough, unpaved roads andspeed bumps. Also, do not at-tempt to go through an auto-matic car wash as the vehiclemay get caught, resulting indamage.

PS41533

1. Get the required tools andspare tire.

1. Tie−down belt2. Tool bag3. Jack handle4. Spare tire5. Jack

Split seat only—Before removing thedeck board, slide the rear seat fullyforward.To remove the deck board, see“Luggage storage box” on page 175in Section 1−10.You will find a wheel nut wrench inthe tool bag.

06 12.21

—Required tools and sparetire


To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.

PS41503

SM41002

To remove the jack, move the driverseat to the front−most position and re-move the cover.To remove: Turn the joint in direction1 by hand until the jack is free.To store: Turn the joint in direction 2by hand until the jack is firmly securedto prevent it flying forward during acollision or sudden braking.

06 12.21


PS41532

To remove the spare tire, loosen thebolt and remove it.Then take the spare tire out of thevehicle.When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the inner side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire by re-peating the above removal steps inreverse order to prevent it from flyingforward during a collision or suddenbraking.The compact tire storage area is de-signed only for a compact spare tire.Standard size tire cannot be storedin this storage area.

—Blocking the wheel

PS41505

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

PS41506

Steel wheels (type A)

PS41507

Steel wheels (type B)

06 12.21

—Removing wheel ornament(on some models)


3. Remove the wheel ornament.Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrenchas shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-ment by hand. Take due care inhandling the ornament to avoidunexpected personal injury.

—Loosening wheel nuts

PS41508

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.The nuts turn counterclockwise toloosen. To get maximum leverage, fitthe wrench to the nut so that the han-dle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grasp the wrench near theend of the handle and pull up on thehandle. Be careful that the wrenchdoes not slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one−half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may loos-en and the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

06 12.21


—Positioning the jack

PS41509

5. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.

—Raising your vehicle

PS41510

6. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, raise it highenough so that the spare tirecan be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle into the jack (it is a loose fit)and turn it clockwise. As the jacktouches the vehicle and begins to lift,double−check that it is properly posi-tioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

06 12.21


—Changing wheels

NS41511

7. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

NS41512

Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal−to−met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

PS41534

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire and see if you can tighten themmore.

06 12.21


CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loosen and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

—Lowering your vehicle

PS41514

9. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-wise to lower the vehicle.Use only the wheel nut wrench totighten the nuts. Do not use othertools or any additional leverage otherthan your hands, such as a hammer,pipe or your foot. Make sure thewrench is securely engaged over thenut.Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

! When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

! Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 103 N·m(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

! Do not attach a heavily dam-aged plastic wheel ornament.It may fly off the wheel andcause accidents while the ve-hicle is moving.

06 12.21


—Stowing flat tire10.Restow all the tools and jack se-

curely. Then secure the flat tirewith the tire tie−down belt in theluggage compartment as fol-lows.

Before stowing flat tire, remove theluggage cover. (See “Luggage cover”on page 175 in Section 1−10.)

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

PS41515

1. Aluminum wheels—Before stow-ing the flat tire, remove the centerwheel ornament by pushing fromthe reverse side.Be careful not to lose the wheelornament.

PS41516

2. Hook each belt end to the corre-sponding anchor brackets. Then,put the center portion of the beltonto the rear center head re-straint.

3. Return the deck board to the origi-nal position and then lock it. (See“Luggage storage box” on page175 in Section 1−10.)

06 12.21


PS41517

4. Lay the flat tire on the luggagefloor so that the outer side of thetire wheel faces toward the rearof the vehicle. Detach the rearcenter head restraint from the seatand release the belt.

PS41518

5. Pass the belt through the centerhole of the flat tire wheel.

PS41519

6. Put the center portion of the beltonto the rear center head restraintposition and then return the rearcenter head restraint.

06 12.21


PS41520

7. Hold the buckle and pull the beltto secure the tire.

After stowing the flat tire, check thatthe tire and belt are secured.

—After changing wheels11.Check the air pressure of the re-

placed tire.Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 299 inSection 8. If the pressure is lower,drive slowly to the nearest servicestation and fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 299 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. And havea technician repair the flat tire.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

PS41531

Position the tools as shown in the il-lustration. Fold the tool bag over andthen restow it.

06 12.21


If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

! Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

! Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

! If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

PS41522

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

06 12.21

If your vehicle becomes stuckIf your vehicle needs to betowed—


If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergencytowing” in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following fewprecautions are observed. If necessary,show this page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From rear—

! Manual transmission:

We recommend using a towing dollyunder the front wheels. If you do notuse a towing dolly, place the ignitionkey in the “ACC” position and put thetransmission in neutral.

NOTICE

Do not tow with the key removed orin the “LOCK” position when towingfrom the rear without a towing dolly.The steering lock mechanism is notstrong enough to hold the frontwheels straight.

! Automatic transmission:

Use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatictransmission from the rear with thefront wheels on the ground, as thismay cause serious damage to thetransmission.

(b) Using flat bed truck

06 12.21


PS41523

(c) Towing with sliding typetruck

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

—Emergency towing

PS41524

Front

PS41525

Rear

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If a towing service is not available inan emergency, your vehicle may betemporarily towed by a cable or chainsecured to either the emergency towingeyelet on the front of the vehicle or tothe right emergency towing eyelet un-der the rear of the vehicle. Use extremecaution when towing vehicles.

Vehicles with an automatic transmis-sion, use only the front towing eyeletwhen towing your vehicle.

To install the front towing eyelet, see“—Installing front towing eyelet” on page243 in this Section.

NOTICE

! Only use specified towing eyelet;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

! Vehicles with an automatic trans-mission, never tow a vehicle fromthe rear with four wheels on theground. This may cause seriousdamage to the transmission.

06 12.21


A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing eyelets and towing cable orchain. The eyelets and towing cableor chain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

! Use only a cable or chain specifi-cally intended for use in towing ve-hicles. Securely fasten the cable orchain to the towing eyelet provided.

! Do not use the left rear eyelet. It isnot designed for towing.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the transmission in neutral (manu-al) or “N” (automatic). The key must bein “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine run-ning).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

PS41526

1. Remove the front towing eyelet coveron the front bumper, using a flatheadscrewdriver which is wrapped with acloth.

06 12.21

—Installing front towing eyelet


PS41527

2. Use the towing eyelet in the tool bag.Secure the front towing eyelet to thehole on the front bumper by turningclockwise. (For the tool bag storagelocation, see “—Required tools andspare tire” on page 230.)

PS41528

3. Tighten the front towing eyelet securelyby a wheel nut wrench.

CAUTION

When installing the eyelet on the ve-hicle, be sure to tighten the fronteyelet securely. If the eyelet is loose,it may come off when being towedand result in death or serious injury.

PS41529

If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flatheadscrewdriver or equivalent.

06 12.21

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever


PS41530

3. Insert your finger into the hole topush down the shift lock overridebutton. You can shift out of “P”position only while pushing the but-ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If you lose your keysYou can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number. If your vehicle is equippedwith the engine immobilizer system, thedealer will also need your master key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer sys-tem—Even if you lose only one key, con-tact your Toyota dealer to make a newkey. If you lose all your master keys, youcannot make new keys; the whole engineimmobilizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 10 in Section 1−2.

You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new key. Contact yourToyota dealer for detailed information.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

06 12.21


06 12.21


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 5


Toyota, through its diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

! The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

! Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

! Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

! High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

! Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

! High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

! If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

! High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

! Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” formore tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

06 12.21

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

! When driving in a coastal area

! When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

! When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

! When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

! When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

! When cleaning under floor or chas-sis, be careful not to injure yourhands.

! Exhaust gases cause the exhaustpipe to become quite hot. Whenwashing the vehicle, be careful notto touch the pipe until it has cooledsufficiently, as touching a hot ex-haust pipe can cause burns.

NOTICE

When the front wiper arms need to belifted away from the windshield towash the vehicle, raise the arm onthe driver side first. Conversely, whenreturning the wipers to their originalpositions, fold down the arm on thefront passenger side first. Failure toperform the operations in the correctorder results in damage.

06 12.21

Washing and waxing yourToyota


1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or the wheelwells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stance splash an ornament, be sure towash them off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not useorganic substances or scrub them with ahard brush. This may damage the sur-faces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

NOTICE

! Do not use organic substances(gasoline, kerosene, benzine orstrong solvents), which may be tox-ic or cause damage.

! Do not scrub any part of the ve-hicle with a hard brush, which maycause damage.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure to remove it before drivingyour Toyota through an automatic carwash.

06 12.21


Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

Windshield washer nozzles: Make surethat the nozzles do not become blockedwhen waxing. If a nozzle becomesblocked, contact your Toyota dealer tohave the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on thesurfaces of the lights. Wax may causedamage to the lenses. If you accidentallyput wax on the light surfaces, wipe orwash it off.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

Cleaning the interior

CAUTION

! Vehicles with side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbags and curtainshield airbags from activating cor-rectly, resulting in serious injury.

! Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

06 12.21


Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

! Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

! Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the win-dows, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Air conditioning control panel, car au-dio, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

06 12.21


NOTICE

! Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

! If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

! If you use a liquid car freshener, donot spill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

! If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

! Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

! Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

! Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

! Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

! The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

! Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.

06 12.21


06 12.21


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 260. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

06 12.21

SECTION 6


Maintenance requirementsYour Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, trouble−free, safe, and economicaldrivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to insure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to havemaintenance, replacement, or repair ofthe emission control devices andsystem performed by any automotiverepair establishment or individualwithout invalidating this warranty. See“Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” forcomplete warranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented in Section 7.

06 12.21


If you are a skilled do−it−yourselfmechanic, the Toyota service manuals arerecommended. Please be aware thatdo−it−yourself maintenance can affect yourwarranty coverage. See “Owner’s WarrantyInformation Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement” for the details.

General maintenanceListed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluidMake sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See Section 7−3 for additional in-formation.

Engine coolant levelMake sure the coolant level is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−through reservoir when the engine is cold.See Section 7−2 for additional information.

Radiator, condenser and hosesCheck that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt or insects. See Section 7−2for additional information.

Battery conditionCheck the battery condition by the indica-tor color. See page 284 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Brake fluid levelMake sure the brake fluid level is correct.See Section 7−2 for additional information.

Engine oil levelCheck the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level ground. See Section 7−2 foradditional information.

Exhaust systemIf you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 181 in Section 2.)

06 12.21


INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

LightsMake sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzersCheck that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheelBe alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

SeatsCheck that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraint move up and down smooth-ly and that the locks hold securely in anylatched position. For folding−down rearseatbacks, check that the latches lock se-curely.

Seat beltsCheck that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Clutch pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation.

Brake pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

BrakesIn a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brakeCheck that the lever has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nismCheck the lock release button of the se-lector lever for proper and smooth opera-tion. On a safe incline, check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in “P” position and all brakes re-leased.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Fluid leaksCheck underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wateror other fluid after the vehicle has beenparked for a while. If you smell fuel fumesor notice any leak, have the cause found andcorrected immediately.

Doors and engine hoodCheck that all doors and back door oper-ate smoothly and all latches lock securely.Make sure the engine hood secondarylatch secures the hood from opening whenthe primary latch is released.

06 12.21


Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See Section 7−2 for additionalinformation.Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See Sec-tion 7−2 for additional information.When checking the tires, make sureno nuts are missing, and check thenuts for looseness. Tighten them ifnecessary.Tire rotationRotate the tries according to themaintenance schedule. (Forscheduled maintenance information,please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.) See Section7−2 for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

! Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

! Appreciable loss of power

! Strange engine noises

! A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

! Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

! Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

! Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

! Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

! Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal al-most touches floor; vehicle pulls to oneside when braking

! Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

06 12.21

Does your vehicle needrepairing?


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

06 12.21

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 7− 1


Engine compartment overview

1. Windshield washer and rear windowwasher fluid tank

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Fusible link block

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse block

6. Battery

7. Radiator

8. Condenser

9. Electric cooling fan

10. Engine coolant reservoir

11. Engine oil level dipstick

06 12.21

PS71507a


Fuse locations

PS71502

PS71508

PS71504

Sparefuses

PS71505

06 12.21


If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools”.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

CAUTION

! When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

! Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

! If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

! Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

! Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

! Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

! Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

! Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfans or radiator grille. With theignition on, the electric cooling fanswill automatically start to run if theengine coolant temperature is highand/or the air conditioning is on.

! Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

! Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

! Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

06 12.21

Do−it−yourself serviceprecautions


! Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

! Take care when filling the brake andclutch fluid reservoirs becausebrake fluid can harm your eyes anddamage painted surfaces. If fluidgets in your eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water immediately. If youstill feel uncomfortable with youreyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

! Remember that battery and ignitioncables carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

! Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non−silicate,non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-rate coolant with long−life hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water (forthe U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%deionized water (for Canada).

! If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.

! Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plugholes.

! Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

! Do not reuse iridium−tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

! Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid, or the transmissioncould be damaged.

! Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

! Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

! When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

06 12.21


Parts and toolsHere is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):! “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-

lent See page 270 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:! Rag or paper towel! Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Parts (if level is low):! “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-trite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%coolant and 45% deionized water (forCanada).

Tools:! Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Parts (if level is low):! SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

brake fluid

Tools:! Rag or paper towel! Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:! Warm water! Baking soda! Grease! Conventional wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):! Fuse with same amperage rating as

original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:! Water! Washer fluid containing antifreeze

(for winter use)

Tools:! Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:! Bulb with same number and wattage

rating as original (See charts in“Replacing light bulbs” on page 288 inSection 7−3.)

! Flathead screw driver

06 12.21


Positioning the jack

PS71506

Front ofvehicle

Do not jack up

Lowerback outerpanel(protrusion)

When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustration.

Jack position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front—Front suspension memberRear—Lower back outer panel

Support position for Pantograph jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

! Follow jacking instructions.

! Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by ajack. Personal injury may occur.

! Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

! Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”(automatic) or reverse (manual).Block the wheels on the oppositeside of the jack up point if neces-sary.

! Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

! Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone; use vehicle support stands.

! Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

! When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.

06 12.21


06 12.21


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 7− 2


Checking the engine oil level

BS72001

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on level ground. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—Push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated as follows:

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp.qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see “Servicespecifications” on page 297 in Section 8.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE

! Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

! Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

! Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

06 12.21


ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade and viscos-ity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

Recommended viscosity:

SAE 5W−30

OIL008Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy, and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE10W−30 oil may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W−30 atthe next oil change.

API02

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is added to some oil con-tainers to help you select the oil youshould use.

06 12.21


Z72109

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on thereservoir. If the level is low, add thecoolant. (For the coolant type, see“Coolant type selection” described be-low.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “LOW” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”line.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap,radiator cap and drain cock and waterpump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−life hy-brid organic acid technology. (Coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology isa combination of low phosphates and or-ganic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35!C(−31!F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42!C(−44!F).

NOTICE


06 12.21

Checking the engine coolantlevel


Z72109

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your enginecoolant system with proper usage. “ToyotaSuper Long Life Coolant” is formulatedwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology and has been specificallydesigned to avoid engine cooling systemmalfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

Checking brake fluid

PS72501

Before checking or adding the brakefluid, remove the cover. (See “(c) Jumpstarting” on page 223 in Section 4.)

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear. Sobe sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

06 12.21

Checking the radiator andcondenser


Remove and replace the reservoir cap byhand. Fill the brake fluid to the dottedline. This brings the fluid to the correctlevel when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoirbecause brake fluid can harm yourhands or eyes. If fluid gets on yourhands or in your eyes, flush the af-fected area with clean water immedi-ately. If you still feel uncomfortablewith your hands or eyes, go to thedoctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wipe it off to prevent it from dam-aging the parts or paintwork.

PS72502

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on page 296 and 299. Theyare also described on the tire andloading information label as shown.You should check the tire inflationpressures every two weeks, or atleast once a month. And do not forgetthe spare!The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:" The pressure should be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

06 12.21

Checking tire inflationpressure


" Always use a tire pressuregauge. The appearance of a tirecan be misleading. Besides, tireinflation pressures that are evenjust a few pounds off can degraderide and handling.

" Take special care when addingair to the compact spare tire.The smaller tire size can gainpressure very quickly. Add com-pressed air in small quantities andcheck the pressure often until itreaches the specified pressure.

" Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

" Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.

PS72503

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying toomuch air, press the center of thevalve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and ad-justment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.

06 12.21


CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure (underinfla-tion)—" Excessive wear" Uneven wear" Poor handling" Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire" Poor sealing of the tire bead" Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation" A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—" Poor handling" Excessive wear" Uneven wear" A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Checking and replacing tires

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “∆” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

06 12.21


The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep enough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be replaced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires.Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label.For details about the sidewall of thetire and the Certification Label, seepages 191 and 188.

06 12.21


CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries." Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

" Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both of the front or reartires be replaced at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page228 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be replacedwith a new one.

Rotating tires

PS72504

To equalize the wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.).However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.

06 12.21


See “If you have a flat tire” on page228 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

CAUTION

Do not include a compact sparetire when rotating the tires. It isdesigned for temporary use only.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION

Do not use snow tires other than themanufacturer’s recommended size, asthis may cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol. Otherwise, an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

" Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

" Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

06 12.21

Installing snow tires andchains


TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size andtype.

Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chainsexcept radial cable chains or V−bar typechains.

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

" Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

" Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

" Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

" When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to use a tire chain onthe compact spare tire, as it may re-sult in damage to the vehicle as wellas the tire.

Replacing wheelsWHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or theymay cause loss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

This must be observed on compact sparetires, too.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

06 12.21


Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size, asthis may cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol. Otherwise, an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

Aluminum wheel precautions" When installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

" If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

" When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

" Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

" When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

" As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

06 12.21


06 12.21


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 7− 3


CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

! Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

! Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

! Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

! Never ingest electrolyte.

! Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

! Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

! If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

! If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

! If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

! If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

—Checking battery exterior

PS73525

Hold−downclamp

Terminals

Ground cable

Before checking the battery, remove thecover. (See “(c) Jump starting” on page223 in Section 4.)

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten the clamp nut—but do not over-tighten.

06 12.21

Checking battery condition——Precautions


c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

NOTICE

! Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

! When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“−” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

! Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

! Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

—Checking battery condition

Type A

Green DarkClear or light yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY THE INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type B

GREEN BLUE Good

DARK WHITE

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

CLEARor

LIGHTYELLO

W

REDHave batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

06 12.21


Battery recharging precautionsDuring recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

! Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

! Only do a slow charge (5A or less).Charging at a quicker rate is dan-gerous. The battery may explode,causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

Checking and replacing fuses

LS73002Good Blown

Type A

PS73502

Good Blown

Type B

06 12.21


PS73524

Good Blown

Type C

PS73504

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 263 in Sec-tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. SeeSection 8 for the functions controlled byeach circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by thepull−out tool. The location of the pull−outtool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “A/C”fuse, which may be dispensable fornormal driving, and use it if its amperagerating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

06 12.21


If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

Adding washer fluidIf any washer does not work or the lowwindshield washer fluid level warninglight comes on, the washer tank may beempty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Replacing light bulbs—The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

The high mounted stoplight consists of anumber of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burnout, take your vehicle to your Toyota deal-er to have the light replaced.

CAUTION

! To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

! Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

06 12.21


The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Light bulbs BulbNo. W Type

Headlights — 60/55 A

Parking lights — 5 E

Front fog lights — 55 B

Front side markerlights

— 5 E

Front turn signallights

— 21 D

Side turn signallights

— 5 F∗

Rear turn signallights

— 21 D

Tail/stop and rearside marker lights

— 21/5 E

Back−up lights — 21 C

License plate lights — 5 E

Interior light — 8 G

Personal light — 8 E

Luggagecompartment light

— 5 G

∗: Side turn signal lights should be re-placed as an assembly.

A: HB2 halogen bulbsB: H11 halogen bulbsC: Single end bulbsD: Single end bulbs (amber)E: Wedge base bulbsF: Wedge base bulbs (amber)G: Double end bulbs

06 12.21


—Headlights

PS73505

1. Open the hood. Unplug the connec-tor. Remove the rubber cover.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

PS73506

2. Release the bulb retaining springand remove the bulb. Install a newbulb and the bulb retaining spring.

To install a bulb, align the tabs of thebulb with the cutouts of the mountinghole.

PS73507

3. Install the rubber cover as shownand fit it securely on the boss. Plugin the connector.

Make sure the rubber cover fits securelyon the connector and the headlight body.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

06 12.21


If either the left or right front fog, frontside marker lights or LED type highmounted stoplight burns out, contact yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front fog orfront side marker lights by yourself.You may damage the vehicle.

—Parking lights

PS73522

PS73509

—Front turn signal lights

PS73523

PS73513

06 12.21

—Front fog, front side markerlights and LED type highmounted stoplight


—Side turn signal lights

PS73514Front ofvehicle

US73003

PS73516

PS73517

PS73518

a: Tail/stop and rear side marker lightsb: Rear turn signal lightc: Back−up lights

06 12.21

—Tail/stop and rear sidemarker, rear turn signal andback−up lights


—License plate lights

PS73519

Use a flathead screwdriver.

PS73520

PS73521

06 12.21


06 12.21


SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weights 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 8


Dimensions and weightsOverall length mm (in.) 3825 (150.6)

Overall width mm (in.) 1695 (66.7)

Overall height mm (in.) 1530 (60.2)

Wheelbase mm (in.) 2460 (96.9)

Front tread mm (in.) 1480 (58.3)∗1

1470 (57.9)∗2

Rear tread mm (in.) 1470 (57.9)∗1

1460 (57.5)∗2

Vehicle capacity weight(occupants + luggage)

kg (lb.) 383 (845)

Towing capacity∗3 (trailer + cargo weight)

kg (lb.) 318 (700)∗1: With P175/65R14 81S tires∗2: With P185/60R15 84T tires∗3: For Canada only

EngineModel:

1.5 L 4−cylinder (1NZ−FE)

Type:4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):75.0 ! 84.7 (2.95 ! 3.33)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):1496 (91.3)

FuelFuel type:

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):42 (11.1, 9.2)

06 12.21


Service specificationsENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:DENSO SK16R11NGK IFR5A11

Spark plug gap, mm(in.):1.1 (0.043)

Drive belt tension measured with Boroughsdrive belt tension gauge No. BT−33−73F(used belt), lbf:

Generator belt 100!20

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.qt.):

With filter 3.7 (3.9, 3.3)Without filter 3.4 (3.6, 3.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade and viscos-ity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 5W−30

OIL008Outside temperature

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):Manual transmission 4.8 (5.1, 4.2)Automatic transmission 4.7 (5.0, 4.1)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle at factoryfill. In order to avoid technical problems,only use “Toyota Super Long Life Cool-ant” or similar high quality ethylene gly-col based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology.(Coolant with long−life hybrid organicacid technology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20!C (68!F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all the lightsturned off

Charging rates: 5 A max.

06 12.21


CLUTCH

Pedal free play, mm (in.):5—15 (0.2—0.6)

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1.9 (2.0, 1.7)

Oil type:Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 75W−90

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp. qt.): 2.5 (2.6, 2.2)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF WS

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATFJWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuringmaximum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATFWS” may cause deterioration in shiftquality, locking up of your transmissionaccompanied by vibration, and ultimate-ly damage the automatic transmissionof your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the pressure of 300 N (31 kgf, 67.4lbf) with the engine running, mm (in.):

With anti−lock brake system 73 (2.9)Without anti−lock brake system 70 (2.8)

Pedal free play, mm (in.): 1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when pulled withthe force of 200 N (20 kgf, 45 lbf):

6—9 clicks

Fluid type: SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play: Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

06 12.21


TiresTire size and cold tire inflation pressure:Front and rear

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire size Front Rear Wheel sizeP175/65R14 81S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 14 x 5J

P185/60R15 84T 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 15 x 5 1/2J

For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add20 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 3 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire inflationpressure molded on the tire sidewall.Spare

Tire size Tire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size

T125/70D15 95M 420 (4.2, 60) 15 x 4T

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·Ibf):103 (10.5, 76)

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, page 274 through 281 in Section 7−2.

06 12.21


Fuses

PS81501

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. AM2 15 A: Starting system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system

2. HORN 10 A: Horn

3. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

4. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse



7. FR DEF 20 A: No circuit

PS81502

Instrument panel

8. ABS2/VSC2 30 A: Anti−lock brake sys-tem

9. H−LP MAIN 30 A: No circuit

10. ST 30 A: Starting system

11. S−LOCK 20 A: No circuit

12. DOME 15 A: Interior light, personallights, theft deterrent system, audiosystem, wireless remote control system

13. ECU−B 7.5 A: Engine immobilizer sys-tem, daytime running light system, frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem, power windows, door lock system,theft deterrent system, meter andgauge

PS81503

Instrument panel

14. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

15. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, electronic throttle controlsystem

16. HAZ 10 A: Turn signal lights, emergen-cy flashers

17. H−LP RH/H−LP LO RH 10 A: Right−hand headlight

18. H−LP LH/H−LP LO LH 10 A: Left−hand headlight

19. EFI2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

06 12.21


PS81504

Instrument panel

20. ACC2 7.5 A: Shift lock system

21. TAIL 10 A: Side marker lights, parkinglights, tail lights, license plate lights,multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system

22. PANEL1 7.5 A: Illuminations, instru-ment panel light control, meter andgauge

23. A/C 7.5 A: Rear window defogger, airconditioning system

24. D DOOR 20 A: No circuit

25. RL DOOR 20 A: Rear passenger’spower window (left side)

PS81505

Engine compartment

26. RR DOOR 20 A: Rear passenger’spower window (right side)

27. CIG 15 A: Power outlet

28. ACC 7.5 A: Door lock system, outsiderear view mirrors, audio system

29. ID/UP/MIR HTR 10 A: Multiport fuelinjection system/sequential multiportfuel injection system

30. IGN 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, engine immobilizer system,SRS airbag system, front passengeroccupant classification system

31. MET 7.5 A: Meter and gauge

32. WIP 25 A: Windshield wiper

33. RR WIP 15 A: Rear wiper

34. WSH 15 A: Windshield wiper and rearwiper

35. ECU−IG 10 A: Daytime running lightsystem, anti−lock brake system, elec-tric power steering system, power win-dows, door lock system, theft deterrentsystem, electric cooling fan

36. GAUGE 10 A: Charging system, turnsignal lights, emergency flashers,buck−up lights, instrument panel lightcontrol, shift lock system, rear windowdefogger, air conditioning system, auto-matic transmission system

37. OBD2 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

38. STOP 10 A: Stop lights, high mountedstop light, multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, shift lock system, anti−lockbrake system

39. D/L 25 A: Door lock system

40. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

41. AM1 25 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

06 12.21


Fuses (type B)

42. HTR SUB2 40 A: Air conditioning sys-tem

43. EPS 50 A: Electric power steering sys-tem

44. ABS1/VSC1 50 A: Anti−lock brake sys-tem

45. HTR 40 A: Air conditioning system

46. RDI 30 A: Electric cooling fan

47. HTR SUB1 30 A: Air conditioning sys-tem

48. H−LP CLN/PWR HTR 30 A: No circuit

49. AMT 50 A: No circuit

50. DEF 30 A: Rear window defogger

51. PWR 30 A: Power windows

Fuses (type C)

52. ALT 120 A: Charging system, “HTRSUB2”, “EPS”, “ABS1/VSC1”, “HTR”,“ABS2/VSC2”, “HTR SUB1”, “RDI”,“DEF”, “FR FOG”, “OBD2”, “D/L”,“STOP” and “AM1” fuses

53. MAIN 60 A: “EFI”, “HORN”, “AM2”,“ALT−S”, “DOME”, “ST”, “ECU−B”,“ETCS”, “HAZ”, “H−LP LH/H−LP LOLH” and “H−LP RH/H−LP LO RH” fuses

06 12.21


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERSReporting safety defects for U.S. ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 12.21

SECTION 9


If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotline toll−freeat 1−888−327−4236 (TTY:1−800−424−9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or writeto: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor ve-hicle safety from http://www.safer-car.gov.

06 12.21

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners

Publication No. OM52754UPart No. 01999-52754Printed in Japan 01−0702−00

( U)

U−4

I

Quick index

! If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 114. . . . . . .

! If your vehicle will not start 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! If your engine stalls while driving 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! If you cannot increase engine speed 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! If your vehicle overheats 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! If you have a flat tire 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! If your vehicle needs to be towed 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! Tips for driving during break-in period 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! How to start the engine 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! General maintenance 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher

See page 178 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 42 L (11.1 gal., 9.2 lmp.gal.)

Engine oil: ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 271 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 274 through 281.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 299.


06 12.21

Documents

Foreword - Amazon S3 · 2007 YARIS HATCHBACK from Feb. ’07Prod. (OM52754U) Important information about your Toyota Occupant restraint systems Toyota encourages you and your family